Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 3354 - Contract - Knox Gailey & Meador, Municipal Building Improvements - 04/14/1990
HW:js RESOLUTION Resolution # _ 3354 April 14, 1990 Item #39 BID #10566 BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and between the City of Lubbock and Knox, Gailey & Meador for Municipal Building Improvements, attached herewith, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this nette boya, Lity Secretar APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: ne taas, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: arold WiTTard, Assista—ht City Attorney 12th day of April , 1990. AB.C* + K McMIN , MAYOR ex , CHANGE ORDER NUMBER ONE BID NUMBER 10566 TO: Knox, Gailey and Meador, Inc. P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79417 Original Amount of Contract Amount Previous Change Orders Net Amount this Change Order Amended Amount of Contract Percentage Change of Contract Price is 3.6% Additional Time of Completion is 0 days The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is September 7, 1990. $137,219.00 -0- 4,995.00 $ 142,214.00 WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The contractor to furnish all labor and material to install new carpet in the Accounting area due to existing carpet color is no longer being manufactured. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the _day of /*d:,, _ 1990. CONTRACTOR: Knox,T1" By , , wo TITLE Attest: /I L Secretary OWNER: Inc. City Of Lubbock BY: �4w Deputy City Manager APPROVED AS TO C TENT D' . of i ding Services CHANGE ORDER NUMBER TWO BID NUMBER 10566 TO: Knox Gailey & Meador, Inc. P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79417 Original Amount of Contract $ 137,219.00 Amount Previous Change Orders Net Amount this Change Order 4,484.00 Amended Amount of Contract 189.00 $ 141,892.00 Percentage Change of Contract Price is 30 Additional Time of Completion is 0 days The Date of Substantial Completion as of this Change Order is September 3, 1990 WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The contractor to furnish all labor and material to change carpet selection, revise duct work and move wall as per attached letter. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the /3 day of August, 1990., CONTRACTOR: OWNER: Knox, 'le Meador, Inc. City Of Lubbock :a By BY: _J(,� i'� TITLE Deputy City Manager APPROVED AS TO CONTENT r. Building Services August 7, 1990 Jerry Smith City Of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas Re: Municipal Building Improvements City Of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas Dear Jerry, We propose to move the wall of audit four (4) feet to the north in Accounting Package I. Additional cost for this work will b^e Three Hundred ($300.00) Dollars. Recap: Letter of 5-29-90 Credit for "Topnotch" carpet (-$861.00) Letter of 57-30-90 Revised duct work (+$750.00) Letter of 8-07-90 Move North wall of Audit (+$300.00) Net Change: +$189,00 Sincerely, KnoX, ailey, Meador Don Meador Officer P.O. BOX 5736 • 1109 NORTH AVE. T • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79417 • A.C. 806 763-0418 • FAX 741-0381 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS BID # 10566 K335�1 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas 'A oc neo BID # 10566 ADDENDUM # 1 MAILED TO VENDOR: 3-2-90 CLOSE: 3-9-90 2:00 P.M. PLEASE.NOTE THE FOLLOWING: 1. A pre-bid conference concerning this project has been scheduled for 3-7-90 at 1:30 P.M. Committee Room 103. -- 2. Please replace U.S. Department of Labor Wage Decision in the General Revenue Sharing section of the bid document with the General Wage Decision attached. THAN OU, ene Eads, CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID .. .U.S. Department of Labor GENERAL WAGE DECISION NO. TX90-15,30 Supersedes General Wage Decision No. TX89-15 State: TEXAS County(ies): Lubbock Construction Type: Building Construction famil homes & apartments�u P g to _,. Description: Building Construction Projects does not include single Y p & including 4 stories). (Use current heavy & highway general wage determination for Paving & Utilities Incidental to Building " Construction), Modification Record: No• - Publication Date Page No.(s) ' Y ucNckfunem 01 Laoor Tx90-15/43 a Basic Fringe 0 Hourly Benefits Rates ACOUSTICAL CEILING and DRYWALL.MECHANICS BRICKLAYERS 10.00 .25 CARPENTERS 11.74 ELECTRICIANS 11'•57 2.23 GLAZIERS 13.25 2.75+ 3.25% LABORERS 9.50 LATHERS 5.95 MASON TENDERS 11.17 PAINTERS 6.25 PLASTERERS 10.50 PLUMBERS (Including HVAC): 11.17 •- _. -.. Mechanical contracts $150,000 or less 10.50 -. Mechanical contracts over $150,000 ROOFERS 15.00 1.59 1.59 SHEET METAL WORKERS (Including Duct 9.710 Work) SPRINKLER FITTERS 8.80 .69 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: 17.70 3.55 Backhoe 10.50 .42 Unlisted classifications needed for work of the classifications listed not included within the scope may be added after award provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR, only as (ii)). 5.5 (a) (1) 0 MAILED TO VENDOR: 3-12-90 CLOSE: 3-9-90 -� NEW CLOSING DATE:3-16-90 BID # 10566B ^- ADDENDUM # 2 PLEASE CHANGE THE FOLLOWING: 1. Please change bid closing date from 3-9-90 to 3-16-90 2:00 p.m. 2. Please note specification changes attached. 3. Please replace original bid proposal form with bid proposal form attached. Note that legal library will be bid as an alternate. THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK -- PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID ADDENDA MARCH 12, 1990 CITY OF LUBBOCK PROJECT FOR MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS BID #10566 1. On the Drawings, Sheet MPE-1; fixture type 'T', delete reference to exit light flashing with fire alarm. 2. Contractor will deliver submittals to owner for distribution to architects. 3. Training room will be completed for temporary use by Accounting before work in Accounting starts. 4. Owner will remove a.11 furnishings from the Accounting and Pur- chasing area prior to renovation. 5. Change time of completion from 120 days to 160 days. BID PROPOSAL BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE DATE PROJECT NO. Proposal of hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of the below, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed works, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed projects including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all tabor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The prices to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be a part, are as follows: BID PACKAGE #1 ACCOUNTING PCMF DOCUMENT ARCHIVES ALTERNATIVE #1 (ADDITIVE) ($ NEW CARPET BID PACKAGE #2 (ALTERNATE) LEGAL LIBRARY ($ ) ALTERNATIVE #1 (ADDITIVE) ($ ) ADDITIONAL SPACE BID PACKAGE # 3 (GENERAL REVENUE SHARING) TRAINING RROM �^ TOTAL BID ) (BID PACKAGE 1 and 3) ($ .� (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Supplier hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $100.00 �^ (One Hundred dollars) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this proposal shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars ($), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated M.. damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Contractor BY: (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: "� Secretary CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS for TITLE: MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS ADDRESS: 1625 13TH STREET BID NUMBER: 10566 PROJECT NUMBER: 1481-552101-9467 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department -1- (This page left blank intentionally) INDEX PAGE 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS ............................................ ....3 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ............................ ._..._4 .. 3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS ............................... ...10 4. PAYMENT BOND............................................................. ......13 5. PERFORMANCE BOND .................................... .....16 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ................................... 7. CONTRACT ........................................... ......21 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT ........................... .......23 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS.............................................41 .:.................................. 10. SPECIFICATIONS........... 11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS ............................ ........43 12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE ....................................... ..:.....45 -2- (This page left blank intentionally) NOTICE TO BIDDERS -3- (This page left blank intentionally) NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID # 10566 ^` Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 9th day of March 1990, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Gene Eads, Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. �.. The City Council will consider the bids on the 22nd day of March 1990, at Municipal Bldg., Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds must be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock,'or-a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid sumbitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. �., It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall,be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid sumbitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be �.. -examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. The above described project will be paid for in part or in whole from the General Revenue Sharing program and the contract for this project must comply with the provisions of the Davis -Bacon Act which requires the payment of federal minimum wages. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the ground of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on 1st day of March, 1990 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Committee Room 103, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street. CITY OF LUBBOCK Y: ene Eads, C.P.M. Purchasing Manager ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID # 10566 Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2':00 o'clock n m on the 9th day of March 1990, to furnish -- all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. The above described project will be paid for in part or in whole from the General Revenue Sharing program and the contract for this project must comply with the provisions of the Davis -Bacon Act which requires the payment of federal minimum wages. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on lst day of March. 1990 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Committee Room 103, Municipal Building, 1625 13t Street. Y:Ge'e ads, C.P.M. Purchasing Manager (This page left blank intentionally) GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -4- (This page left blank intentionally) GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following: Municipal building improvements on the accounting PCMF document archives and the legal library. The contractor shall furnish alt labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the Gen- eral Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so sub- mitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure comple- tion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT �— All payments due to Contractor shalt be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for tabor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. paid in full and that there are no claims -5- 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for pro- tecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provi- sion. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against de- fective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished di- rectly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup- pliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Con- tractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materi- als, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construc- tion, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City re- serves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the ma- terials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. -6- 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construc- tion of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will fur- nish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. How- ever, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such under- ground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger sig- nals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and �., lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and re- placed by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barri- cades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blast- ing. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times i while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnsh the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached duing the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. r 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written -7- notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subroga- tion. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shalt further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations there. - under. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract docu- ments does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construc- tion work under this contract requiring an.inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1)- The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deduc- tions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. -8- The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to in- creases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be re- jected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shalt submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, dis- tinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shalt govern. If the proposal is submitted by an indi- vidual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the fol- lowing: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. -9- (This page left blank intentionally) BID PROPOSAL -10- (This page left blank intentionally) te Z BID PROPOSAL BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE PZ� DATE PROJECT N0. -Proposal of / © % (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of the below, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed works, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed projects including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The prices to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be a part, are as follows: BID PACKAGE #1gwts _ ACCOUNTING PCMF DOCUMENT ARCHIVES ALTERNATIVE #1 (ADDITIVE) r/vle ($ , "000'_` ) NEW CARPET BID PACKAGE #2 //-�owa /l//IfE �,�fJG�. 'ill ,�A/,o,P� ($ (ALTERNATE) LEGAL LIBRARY ) ALTERNATIVE #1 (ADDITIVE) ADDITIONAL SPACE ) BID PACKAGE # 3 (GENERAL REVENUE SHARING) TRAINING RROM :J ) �^ TOTAL BID De "�/D6//7' (DID PACKAGE 1 and 3) (Amount shalt be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within '120 consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Supplier hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sun of 5100.00 (One Hundred dollars) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove r v t� for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this proposal shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 7 (S Dollars ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shalt be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Contractor BY: '(Seat if Bidder is a Corporation) k 'ATTES : �— Secretary b SAFECO0 BID BOND Approved by The American Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Document No. A-310 (Feb. 1970 Edition) SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 98185 Bond KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, K NOX , GA I L E Y & MEA DOR , INC. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, of Seattle, Washington, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Washington, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID----------- ----- ------ Dollars ($ -----5%--- ---- ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK BID #10566 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 16TH day of Witness Witness MARCH ,1990.., KNOX, GAILEY & ME OR, INC. (Seal) Principal } DON MEADOR, SECRETARY/TREASURER Title SA FEC SURANCE MPANY OF AMERICA By CARLA WADDELL Attorney -in -Fact Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation. PRINTED IN U.S.A. POWER SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA OF ATTORNEY GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERIC, HOME OFFICE. SAFECO PLAZA " SAFECD SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185, 8035 No. _ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA i..!d GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint ---------------HOWARD COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas ------------ its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character 1ssol -a in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company,thereby IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY .. OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st _ day of November 19 89 CERTIFICATE Extract from the BY -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13. — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys•in -fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V. Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 16TH day of MARCH , 19 90 . S 974 R 10 3. 86 PAYMENT BOND -13- (This page left blank intentionally) e BOND CHECK SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA SAFEC00 BEST RATING FIRSTOF AMERICA INURANCE COMPANY LICENSE I VIAS_0 HO OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 DATI: 'mo 9;0V ef PAYMENT BOND (McGregor Act - Public Works) Texas Bond No. 5645260 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That, we, KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR, INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, with its principal office in the City of Seattle, Washington, and authorized and admitted to do business In the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of ONE HUNDRED TH I RTY-SEVEN THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED NINETEEN AND NO/100 ----------------------- ------------------------ Dollars, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, Jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12TH day of APRIL 1990 ,to wit: r- BID # 10566 - MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS which contract Is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as If copied at engt herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him/her or a sub -contractor In the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as If It were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 17TH day of APR I L 1990 K OX, GAILEY & MEADOR, INC. DON MEADOR, SECRETARY/ TREASURER (Seal) Principal SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA (Seal) BY Seal CARL A WADDE L L Attorney - in - Fact S-2170/EP 11189aQ Registered Trademark of SAFECO Insurance Company PRINTED IN U.S.A. I ® POWER SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA OF ATTORNEY GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE. SAFECO PLAZA SAFECO SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 8035 No. ._ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA <lnd GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint ---------------HOWARD COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas ------------ its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st __ _ _ day of November 19 89 r–CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13. — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys-ln -fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be ^� impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." 1, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 17TH day of APRIL 19 90 S-974 R10 3:86 - PRINTED IN U.S.A. s PERFORMANCE BOND -16- (This page left blank intentionally) P.. e BOND CHECK SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA SAFECO® BEST RATING FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA �C�NsEIi�1 TSA4 HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA D SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 PERFORMANCE BOND ' (McGregor Act - Public Works) V17 - Texas Bond No. 5645260 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That, we, KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, with its principal office In the City of Seattle, Washington, and authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto �., CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of ONE HUNDRED TH I RTY-SEVEN THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED NINETEEN AND NO/100 ----------------------- ------------------------ Dollars, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12TH dayof APRIL 1990 ,to wit: BID #10566 - MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS which contracts here -by referred to and made a part hereof as fully and tot the same extent as It copied at engt herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain In full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined In accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this 17TH day of APRT L 1990 Witness: (Seal) (If Individual or Firm) L— (Seal) A Wst: KNOX, GA I LEY & MEADOR, INC. (Seal) _DON MEADOR, SECRETARY/TREASURER (Seal) (If CorporJationnPrincipal SAFEC SURA CE MPANY OF AMERICA By (Seal) (806)794-5881 CARLA WADDELL Attorney -in -Fact $-2169/EP 11189 ® Registered Trademark of SAFECO Insurance Company PRINTED IN U.S.A. MY -G POWER SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA OF ATTORNEY GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERII HOME OFFICE. SAFECO PLAZA SAFECO SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 ._ 8035 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: No. That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA i,.nd GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint ---------------HOWARD COWAN; CARLA WADDELL; KEVIN J. DUNN, Lubbock, Texas------------ its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issii-d in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 21st day of November 89 19 CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13. — FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys- in -fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, (i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (ii) A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I, Boh A. Dickey, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. .�. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this -- 16TH - day of MARCH , 1 g 90. S 974 RIO 3, 86 s CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE -19- (This page left blank intentionally) he Shropshire Agency, Inc. P. 0. Box 10428 Lubbock, Texas 79408 06-763-7311 CODE SUB -CODE Knox, Galley & Jz. 0. Box 5736 ubbock, Texas o06-763-0418 Meador, Inc. 79417 K 4-17-90 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A LETTER COMPANY LETTER B Appl 1 ed,. for, through, T,., W, C., A__R.,._P. COMPANY c LETTER Uln"i ed StatesFidelity11Guaranty Company COMPANY LETTER D COMPANY LETTER E WN LTHIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED'BELOW REQUIREMENT, HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. 0, TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATIOW POLICY NUMBER DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DDfYY) ALL LIMITS IN THOUSANDS �R. GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS-COMPIOPS AGGREGATE• $ 1 CLAIMS MADE 000 X Occu"'-� 06 OTC P5 5052 07 4-20-90 4-20-91 PERSONAL- &' ADVERTISING INJURY i $ Pew 500 OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT.i EACH OCCURRENCE 500 IRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ MED50 ICAL EXPENSE (Any one person): $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 5 COMBINED ANY AUTO .o60FJ5505208 4-20-90 �SINGLE 4-20-91 LIMIT X ALL OWNED AUTOS � 4, .__ _ � 1. 5 0 0 I BODILY X SCHEDULED AUTOS INJURY $ (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS INJURY zj (Per aceldent), GARAGE LIABILITY � PROPERTY • DAMAGE $ EXCESS LIABILITY . ...... EACH AG(3HEGATE XoccuRRENcE;z o6oxS5505210 14-20-90 �4-20-91 i OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM $ 1 000 1,000 WORKER'S COMPENSATION Applied for through i STATUTORY zLz $ (EACH ACCIDENT) z 4-20-90 1 4-20-91 500 AND 'Assigned Risk Pool z EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY z 500 (DISEASE—POLICY LIMIT) t z (DISEASE EACH EMPLOYEE) OTHER z 500 z t `All Risk Builder's z3-21-90 $ :z Risk, Inc]. Owner z 3-21-91 5,000,000.00 ESCRIPTION OFLOPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VENICLES/RESTRfCTIONSISPiCIAL ITEMS Re: Bid I #10566-minicipal Building Improvements City of Lubbock P. 0. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 L CORD 25-S (3/88) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. LIFE & CASUALTY OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY POLICY DECLARATIONS 14 The Etna Casualty and Surety Company ❑ The Standard Fire Insurance Company ❑ The Automobile Insurance Company of Hartford, Connecticut Hartford, Connecticut 06156 ❑ ktna Casualty & Surety Company of Illinois Downers Grove, Illinois 60515 The declarations, coverage form, and endorsements complete this insurance policy. NAMED INSURED AND MAILING ADDRESS City of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas. THE NAMED INSURED IS ❑ Individual ❑ Partnership Corporation Joint Venture D Other: In return for the payment of the premium, and subjecl by the Stock Insurance Company specified above. .. ......... MI T 1` AGGREGATE LIMIT EACH OCCURRENCE LIMIT >::Ol.: S SIl~ CLASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION Construction Operations - Owner CLASS CODE I EXPOSURE Lubbock, Texas Knox, Gailey and Meador, Inc. P. 0. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79417 NESS OF NAM PREMIUM BASIS COST 137,219.00 PULICY NUMBER 060 PC 5151232 cca POLICY PERIOD FROM 4_12_90 TO t� _ �t 12:01 am STA D_A%b TIME AT THE INSURED'S ADDRE STATED HEREI INSURED - icy, insurance is Drovided to Y I MINIMUM PREMIUM TOTAL TERM POLICY ADVANCE PREMIUM RATES PER $1,000 OF COST $ :MIUM $ $ 226.00 TOTAL ADVANCE PREMIUM $ (Premium May be Subject to 226.00 Adjustment) iaDie or Lontents TITLE Coverate of Operations of Designated Contractor Conditions Requiring Notice Amendment of Pollution Exclusion Texas Changes Additional Insured -Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Additional Inciirrrl_v_ Countersigned on behalf of the above Company THE//��y,��![fS;OPSH E AGENCY, INC. THE ,96 Agent READ YOUR POLICY CAREFULLY DCO27 (ED. 01-86) CG0009 (11-85) CG2824 (11-85) CG2840 (05-86) CG2855 (11-87) CG2007 (11-85) 4-17-90 ms Countersignature Date CAT. 766763 PRINTED IN U.S.A. Signed for the Company by: The Etna Casualty and Surety Company The Standard Fire Insurance Company The Automobile Insurance Company of Hartford, Connecticut Hartford, Connecticut 06156 Secretary V! President Etna Casualty & Surety Company of Illinois Downers Grove, Illinois 60515 Secretary Vice President PREMIUM BASIS Following are brief descriptions of the more common Premium Bases used in calculating the premium for your Owners and Contractors Protective Liability Coverage. These descriptions are subject to more detailed manual rules in use by the Company. 1. Cost. The total cost of all work performed for you by or on behalf of the designated contractor at the location indicated on the Declarations including: (a) All labor, materials and equipment furnished, used or delivered for use in the project; and (b) All fees, bonuses or commissions made, paid or due . The rates apply per $1,000 of total cost. 2. Each. This basis of premium reflects units of exposure. Classifications will determine these units, such as "each permit". Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. and ISO Commercial Risk Services, Inc., with their permission. 1981 through current year, Copyrighted Insurance Services Office, Inc., and ISO Commercial Risk Services, Inc. r• - is P- CONTRACT -21- (This page left blank intentionally) CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK r.. THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 12th day of April 1990, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock,, State of Texas, acting by and through B.C. McMinn, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Knox Gailey & Meador. Inc of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CON- TRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as fol - tows: BID # 10566 - MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE AMOUNT OF $137,219.000 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, toots, superintendence, Labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATT T: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER) 4 Sec tary Bl4r r MAY R ATTES . orporate Se retry -22- P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock. TX 79417 (This page left blank intentionally) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT -23- (This page left blank intentionally) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this con- tract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: Knox, Gaitey & Meador. Inc., who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to JERRY SMITH, DIRECTOR OF BUILDING SERVICES, BUILDING SERVICES, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said -owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of tike import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shalt mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of..description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their na- ture, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no re- sponsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. -24- 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the Last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu- ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract docu- ments ocuments has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly Locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract docu- ments. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract docu- ments, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his on-site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. -25- 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commence- ment of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Con- tractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Repre- sentative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representa- tive at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's --. Representative shalt review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are.to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent ^" to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direc- tion of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising there- from shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. �— The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise rela- tive to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION r - It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative �— may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Con- tractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shalt regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision.. -26- 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work,*from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Con- tractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the na- ture and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of mate- rials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis- orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work with- out the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecu- tion and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall fur- nish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ob- servation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. -27- 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shalt have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such obser- vation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give am- ple notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Rep- resentative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, re- ,,, gardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Repre- sentative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representa- tive to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required r— by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representa- tive, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspec- tions, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which faits to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as un- suitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and re- build or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is fur- ther agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. r- 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shalt not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they in- crease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such ,•. increase shalt be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra work. In -28- case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate- rial already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in. preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, al- teration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not cov- ered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representa- tive when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is com- menced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15X) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this para- graph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shalt be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these mat- ters shalt be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machin- ery and equipment shalt be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15X) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and com- pensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other ele- ments of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Repre- sentative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative in- sists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbi- tration as herein below provided. -29- 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies.or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is r-- received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any re- quest for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein speci- fied, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shalt defend, indem- nify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sus- tained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcon- tractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work pro- gresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assump- tion of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. n -30- 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, in- surance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company au- thorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property Damage. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury $250/500,000 Property Damage $100,000 to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Non - owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of poten- tial loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. -31- E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of ($1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehen- sive Automobile Liability coverages. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Sub- contractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least 5100,000 limit. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shalt submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named in- sured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in ^�- or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shalt be on the form (or identical copies thereof) con- tained in the job specifications." No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be accept- able. 29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any ,... demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shalt furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness -32- shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, de- vice, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Paten- tee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shalt indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is speci- fied or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, de- vice, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harm- less from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by owner is an in- fringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such toss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shalt promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, in- sofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the con- sideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (ONE NUNDREDY DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages -33- breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the com- pletion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consid- eration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this Local- ity. �^ The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impractica- bility and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sus- tain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is furtheragreedand understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION ..., It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Con- tractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this ^^ contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the sev- eral parts. 35. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions�of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walk -outs, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an ex- tension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after re- ceipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested docu- mentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their con- sideration. should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays in- cident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge -34- shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals of- fered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the. Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the perfor- mance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the exis- tence or character of the work. 39. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 40. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of de- fective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shalt satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the con- tract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shalt constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. -35- 41. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an applica- tion for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for par -Val payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound ma- teriaLs delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. A-, The Owner shalt then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, Less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon "^ written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained per- centage due Contractor. 42. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall in- spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in ac- cordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the owner within thirty-one (31) days to �-- issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 43. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shalt certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or be- fore the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this con- tract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special condi- tions (if any) of this contract or required in.the specifications made a part of this contract. 44. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Con- tractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of r-+ responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the -36- date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed de- fects with reasonable promptness. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. TIME OF. FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to. take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shalt be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted other- wise in the contract documents. 48. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shalt be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to se- lect a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the de- cision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should ei- ther party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the ar- biters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. -37- r - The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sus- tained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The ar- biters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writ- ing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the or- ders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and sup- plies as said owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case suchexpense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- pleted by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com-pleted by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by taw, at least twice in a newspa- per having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shalt be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. -38- In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, toots, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shalt be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shalt release any machin- ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorpo- rated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Con- tractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con- tractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shalt pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statu- tory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is fur- ther agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special con- ditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. -39- 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and au- thority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to ob- serve Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work roam clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. in case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. -40- (This page left blank intentionally) r. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS -41- (This page left blank intentionally) `• �� Resolution #2502 January 8, 1987 Agenda Item #18 DGV:da RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works .contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Traces Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day.of January 1987. Ranett&-Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED T- ONTENT: :Bi 1 P yne, D rector of Building Services B.C. MCMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: Do ld G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney Craft EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper. Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician - Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator - Heavy Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator, Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer, General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper - Welder - Certified Hourly Rate $11.60 8.35 5.50 10.50 5.00 11.00 5.50 7.35 8.70 10.50 5.25 8.00 5.70 8.00 7.50 9.50 5.00 7.30 4.75 5.60 8.75 9.25 6.00 7.65 4.75 8.75 5.50 8.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility Mechanic .-Mechanic-Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator �.. Motor Grade Operator. Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light Heavy Hourly Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.25 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Power Line Foreman Lineman Journeyman Lineman Apprentice Series Groundman Series Hourlv Rate $11.00 10.45 8.90 7.25 EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is,.l 1/2 times base rate. -42- (This page left blank intentionally) 0— MUNICIPAL BUILDING BASEMENT RENOVATIONS Purchasing, Accounting, Building Services ,. for the City of Lubbock Lubbock Texas TABLE OF CONTENTS: Following is the enumeration of the technical specifications. Pages Title Page 1 Table of Contents 2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..• Section NO Cutting and Patc ing Section 1G5 Alternates 1 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK not applicable DIVISION 3 CONCRETE —^ not applicable DIVISION 4 MASONRY �. not applicable DIVISION 5 METALS not applicable DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY not appl-icable DIVISION 7 MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 7G0 Thermal Insulation 2 Section 7TO Joint Sealers 3 DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS ec ionass an Glazing 5 Section 8J1 Custom Hollow Metal Work 5 Section 8KO Wood Doors Section 8SO Builders Hardware 5 7 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 9 Predecorated Gypsum Board 4 Section 9DO Gypsum Drywall Section 9EO Acoustical Ceilings 5 Section 9RO Carpeting 6 Section 9170 Painting 4 '" TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 1 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES not -applicable DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT no app icable DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS not -applicable DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION not applicable DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS not applicable DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL section 15A Mechanicaland Electrical General 9 Section 15B Mechanical Identification 3 Section 15C Pipe, Tubes and Fittings 6 Section 15D Supports, Anchors and Seals 3 Section 15E Valves 2 3 Section 15F Vibration Isolation Section 15G Mechanical Insulation 5 Section 15H Fire Protection Systems 4 Section 15I Heating Water Piping 2 2 Section 15J Hydronic Specialties Section 15K Terminal Units 3 $ Section 15L Low Pressure Ductwork Section 15M Pneumatic Temperature Control Systems 5 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 2 section ectrica I entification Section 16B Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16C Wiring Devices 3 5 Section 16D Power Distribution Section 16E Motor and Circuit Disconnects 2 Section 16F Supporting Devices 2 Section 16G Building Lighting 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 SECTION 1G5 RELATED DOCUMENTS The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. GENERAL Each of the Alternates set forth herein shall be bid to show an addition to the BASE BID. The alternates will be considered by the Owner and may or may not be accepted. All work under the alternates shall comply with the applicable provisions of the drawings and specifications. The work under any alternate shall include any additional work required to complete •- the remaining work which is affected thereby, in a finished condition unless specifically noted to remain unfinished. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ALTERNATES ALTERNATE NO. 1: Under Alternate No. 1, the Bidder shall add the cost of installing new carpet in all areas scheduled —to --have ?" carpet. Omit the re -use and re-stretc—ling of existing carpet. END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 1G5-1 SECTION 1C0 CUTTING AND PATCHING GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: Definition: "Cutting -and -patching" is hereby defined to include but is not necessarily limited to the cutting and patching of nominally completed and previously existing work, in order to accommodate the coordination of work, or the installation of other work, or to uncover other work for access or inspection, or to obtain samples for testing, or for similar purposes; and is defined to exclude integral cutting - and -patching during the mfg. fabricating, erecting and installing process for individual units of work. Drilling the work to install fasteners and similar operations are excluded from the definition of cutting -and -patching. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting - and -patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work. Refer to the 15A -Series and.16A-Series sections, for additional requirements and limitation on the cutting -and -patching of mechanical and electrical work, respectively. The requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work unless otherwise indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Requirements for Structural Work: General: Do not cut -and -patch structural work in a manner resulting in as ruction of load -carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. Prior to cutting -and -patching the following categories of work, obtain the Architect's/Engineer's approval to proceed with cutting -and -patching as proposed in the submittal by the Contractor: Structural steel. Miscellaneous structural metals, including lintels, equipment supports, stair systems and similar categories of work. Structural concrete. CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-1 Foundation construction. �., Bearing and retaining walls. Pressurized piping, vessels and equipment. Operational and Safety Limitation: General: Do not cut -and -patch operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in the manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. Prior to cutting -and -patching the following categories of the work, and similar categories where directed, obtain the Architect's/Engineer's approval to proceed with cutting -and - patching as proposed in the Submittal by the Contractor: Sheeting, shoring and cross -lot bracing. Primary operational systems and equipment. Water/moisture/vapor/air/smoke barriers, membranes and flashings. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. Control, communication, conveying, and electrical wiring systems. Visual Requirements: General: Do not cut -and -patch work which is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building, in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the cut -and -patch work, both as judged solely by the Architect. Removal and replace work judged by the Architect to be cut -and -patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. �- Engage the original Installer/Fabricator to perform cutting -and patching of the following categories of exposed work or, where original Installer/Fabricator is not available (e.g. for work of a prior time), engage recognized expert entities to perform cut -and -patch work. Window Wall System. Stucco and ornamental plaster. Acoustical ceilings. Terrazzo Carpeting. r Wall covering. CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-2 SUBMITTALS: Proposals for Cutting -and -Patching: Where prior approval of cutting -and -patching is required, submit proposal well in advance of time work will be performed, and request approval to proceed. Include description of why cutting -and -patching cannot (reasonably) be avoided, how it will be performed, how structural elements (if any) will be reinforced, products to be used, firms and tradesmen to perform the work, approximate dates of the work, and anticipated results in terms of variations from the work as originally completed (structural, operational, visual and other qualities of significance). Where applicable, include cost proposal, suggested alternatives to the cutting -and -patching procedure proposed, and a description of the circumstances which lead to the need for cutting -and -patching. Approval by Architect/Engineer to proceed with proposed cutting - and -patching does not waive right to later require complete removal and replacement of work found to be cut -and -patched in an unsatisfactory manner. PRODUCTS MATERIALS: General: Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the rc itect/Engineer, provide materials for cutting -and -patching which will result in equal -or -better work than the work being cut -and - patched, in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Comply with the requirements, and use materials identical with the original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby. EXECUTION PREPARATION: Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut, to prevent failure. Do not endanger other work. Protection: Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting - and -patching, to prevent damage; and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure. CUTTING AND PATCHING: General: Employ skilled tradesmen to perform cutting -and -patching. Except a otherwise indicated or- approved by the Architect/Engineer, proceed with cutting -and -patching at the earliest feasible time, in each instance, and perform the work promptly. CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-3 r -- Cut work by methods least likely to damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure with original Installer where possible, and comply with his recommendations. In general, where physical cutting action is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over the entire unbroken surface containing the patch, after patched area has received prime and base coats. ii END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-4 SECTION 7G0 THERMAL INSULATION GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of thermal insulation work is shown on the drawings, by the generic name of by its abbreviation. The applications of thermal insulation specified in this section include the following: Blanket -type (Batt -type) building insulation. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Thermal Conductivity: The thicknesses shown are for the thermal conductivity (k -value at 75 degrees F.) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for the equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Fire and Insurance Rating: Comply with the fire -resistance, flammability and insurance ratings indicated, and comply with governing regulations as interpreted by authorities. SUBMITTALS: Mfr's Data: Submit mfr's specifications and installation instructions ori rear —type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. PRODUCT HANDLING: Protection from Deterioration: Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with mfr's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. JOB CONDITIONS: Examination of Substrate: The Installer must examine the substrate and e conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. THERMAL INSULATION 7GO-1 60 PRODUCTS MATFRTAI C- Mineral/Glass Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Inorganic fibers formed into flexible resilient blankets or semi-rigid resilient sheets; FS HH -I-521; density as indicated, but 1.0-1b. minimum; k -value of 0.27 where thickness is indicated, or k -value and thickness as required to provide "R" values as indicated; mfr's standard lengths and widths as required to coordinate with spaces to be insulated; Types as follows: Type I: Unfaced unit; semi-rigid where required for self-support. Miscellaneous Materials: Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as ,.. recommended by the insulation mfr. for the type of application shown, and condition of substrate. EXECUTION r - INSTALLATION: General: Comply with mfr's instructions for the particular conditions Of ins allation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the mfr's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. Apply a single layer of insulation of the required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up the total thickness. General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to the substrate y the method indicated, complying with mfr's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage, to provide'pe-rmanent placement and support of units. Stuff loose fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavits �7__if any. Compact to approximately 40% of normal maximum volume (toea density.of approx. 2.5 lbs. pe cu. ft.) END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 7GO-2 SECTION 7T0 JOINT SEALERS GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the contract, including general and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of each type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section. The required applications include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: Partition and ceiling joints. SUBMITTALS: Mfr's Data: Submit mfr's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of material required. Include mfr's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with specified standards and other requirements, and is intended generally for applications shown. JOB CONDITIONS: Installer must examine joint surfaces and backing, and their anc orage to the structure, and conditions under which joint sealer work is to be performed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work and performance of sealers. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above mfr's recommended temperature range for -installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. PRODUCTS MATFRTAI S_ Colors: For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from mfr's standard colors. For concealed materials, provide natural color which has best overall performance characteristics. JOINT SEALERS 7TO-1 Hardness: As recommended by mfr. for application shown, unless o�erwise indicated. Modules of Elasticity: Provide the lowest available modules of e asticity w is is consistent with exposure to weathering, indentation, vandalism, abrasion, support of loading, and other requirements. Compatibility: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its compati , ,ty with each other material it will be exposed to in joint system. Size and Shape: As shown or, if not shown, as recommended by mfr. for type and condition of joint, and for indicated joint performance or movement. �- Grade of Sealant: For each application, provide grade of sealant (non - sag, se - eve ing, no -track, knife grade, preformed, etc.) as recommended by mfr. for particular condition of installation (location, joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar condition), to achieve best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for normal condition of installation. NON-ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS AND CAULKING COMPOUNDS: Oleo -Resinous Caulking Compound: Oil-based resinous caulking compound complying- wit - -0 98 on-staining,non-bleeding, g, paintable. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended y sealant m r. for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. EXECUTION MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS: Comply with mfr's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where mfr's_ technical representative directs otherwise. JOINT PREPARATION: Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which wold interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Prime or seal joint surfaces where shown or recommended by sealant mfr. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. INSTALLATION: JOINT SEALERS 7TO-2 Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant mfr. but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead: For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint width. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto a joining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. CURE AND PROTECTION: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with mfr's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of Owner's acceptance. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 7TO-3 SECTION 8AO GLASS AND GLAZIlT GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings, and by Provisions of this section. The types of work or locations requiring glass and glazing include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following: Interior doors to be glazed. Interior partitions to be glazed. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Safety Glass Standards: Comply with the following as applicable: Consumer Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201. Industry Standards ANSI Z97.1. Sound Transmission Test Standard: Comply with ASTM E 90. Manufacturers: Provide each type of glass and primary sealant/gasket from a singe mfr. with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the production of materials similar to those required. Installer (Glazier): Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in glazing work similar to required work. SUBMITTALS: Mfr -le r).+— Submit mfr's product specifications, including documentation of compliance with requirements, and instructions for handling, storing, installing, cleaning and protecting each type of glass and glazing material. PRODUCT HANDLING: GLASS AND GLAZING 8AO-1 Comply with mfr's instructions for shipping, handling, storing and protecting glass and glazing materials. Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage/deterioration to coatings (if any) on glass. JOB CONDITIONS: Pre -installation Meeting: Comply with General Requirements for pre- installation meeting of Glazier and other trades affected by glass installation. Inspection: Glazier must examine framing and substrate work to receive glass an glazing materials, and conditions under which glass is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Glazier. Weather: Do not proceed with glazing under adverse weather conditions. nsT a T_liquid sealants when temperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature range recommended by mfr. PRODUCTS PROCESSED GLASS: Tempered Glass: Provide clear prime glass of type indicated, which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed strength. Tong Marks: Provide tempered glass produced by mfr's special process which elimanates tong marks. GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPOUNDS: General: Provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not o erwise indicated, as selected by Architect from mfr's standard colors, or black if no color is so selected. Comply with mfr's recommendations for section of hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials, and variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation. 1 -Part Silicone Rubber Glazing Sealant: Elastomeric silicone sealant complying wi - - ass , non -sag. Provide acid type recommended by mfr. where only nonporous bond surfaces are contacted; provide nonacid type recommended by mfr. where one or more prous bond surfaces are contacted. 1 -Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: Polysulfide elastomeric selant complying with - - ass A, Type II; compounded specifically for exteror exposed glazing. GLASS AND GLAZING 8AO-2 r GLAZING GASKETS: Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets: Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets ot the pro i e and hardne_S_srequired for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket m r. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 durometer hardness, with proven compati , ,ty with sealants used. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility wiTH—s-e-5-1 ants used. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed -cell or waterproof -jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with r- sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection. EXECUTION STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE: Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and air -tight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. •- Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazed components of the work. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within tolerance and necessary dimensions. Comply with combined recommendations of glass mfr. and mfr. of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where mfr's technical representatives direct otherwise. Comply with "Glazing Manual" and other applicable publication by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by mfrs of glass and glazing materials. ^� GLASS AND GLAZING 8AO-3 Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard pieces which have significant edge damage or face imperfections. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other piece. Install polysulfide sealants as recommended by Thiokol Chemical Corp., except as otherwise recommended by the sealant mfrs. PREPARATION FOR GLAZING: Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant mfr. GLAZING: Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1/4th of glass width from each corner. Set blocks in thin course of heel -bead compound, if any. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum Site of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by orming voids or insta ling filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in the sill channels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with mfr's recommendations. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered or heat strengthened, including glass which is heat-treated as a result of a coating process. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. GLASS AND GLAZING 8AO-4 Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead. Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gas ets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in glazing system. CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING: Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with mfr's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to deterioration of glazing materials and other work. Comply with mfr's instructions. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Comply with glass mfr's recommendations for final cleaning. END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING 8AO-5 SECTION 8J1 MEIAL WORK GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of custom hollow metal work is shown on the drawings and schedules. This section includes custom pressed steel frames for doors and related openings. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Provide custom hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Mfr.: Provide custom hollow metal work by one of the following: Allied Steel Products; Fenestra Div., Marmon Group, Inc.; Overly Mfrg, Co.; Pioneer Industries; Trussbilt, Inc.; Williamsburgh Steel Products Co. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Provide fire -rated hollow metal frames investigated and tested as fire door assemblies, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used. Identify each fire frame with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of frame. Construct assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as hereing specified. SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications for fabrication and ins-Eallation, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and insta ation o custom hollow metal work. Include details of each frame type, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of ..finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: ^� Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated torovide during transit and job storage. p protection Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace .- damaged items as directed. Store frames at the building site under cover. Place units on at least 4" high wood sills or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber. If the cardboard wrappers become wet, remove cartons immediately. PRODUCTS MATFRTAI S - Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickles an of e , complyi-n-g—ViFT-A-M A569 and ASTM A568. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16 gage sheet metal. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Mfr's standard units. Shop -Applied Paint: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or a ing, suita a as base for specified finish paints on steel surfaces. FABRICATION: Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in the mfr's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory - assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk at Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. Finish Hardware Preparation: CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-2 Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for frame preparation for hardware. Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings, or if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of fabricated hollow metal units. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate solution (SSPC-PT2), hot phosphate solution (SSPC-PT4) or basic zinc chromate -vinyl butyral solution (SSPC-PT3). Apply shop coat of prime paint within time limits recommended by pretreatment mfr. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not Tess than 2.0 mils. FRAMES: Provide hollow metal frames for doors, side -lights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of size and profile as indicated. Fabricate frames of full -welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, continuously welded full depth and width of frame, unless otherwise indicated. Knock -down type frames are not acceptable. Form frames of either cold or hot -rolled sheet steel for interior. Gage: Not less than 16, for interior openings up to and including 4'-0" wide. Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Reinforce frames for required finish hardware, as o ows: Hinges and Pivots: Steel plate 3/16" thick x 1-1/2" wide x 6" longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot-welds. Strike Plate Clips: Steel plate 3/16" thick x 1-1/2" wide x 3" long. CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-3 Surface -Applied Closers: 12 gage steel sheet, secured with not less than 6 spot -we s. Concealed Closers: Removable steel access plate, 12 gage internal reinforcement of size and shape required, and enclosing housing to keep closer pocket free of mortar or other materials. Mullions and Transom Bars: Provide closed or tubular mullions and ransom bars w ere indicated. Fasten mullions and transom bars at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between frame members with concealed clip angles or sleeves of same metal and thickness as frame. Jamb Anchors: Furnish jamb anchors as required to secure frames to adjacent construction, formed of not less than 18 gage galvanized steel. Metal Stud Partitions: Insert type with notched clip to engage metal Stud, welded to back of frames. Provide at least 4 anchors for each jamb for frames up to 7'-6" in height; 5 anchors up to 8'-0" jamb height; one additional anchor each 24" or fraction thereof over 8'-0" height. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion which extends to floor, formed of not less than 14 gage galvanized steel .�, sheet, as follows: Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors, with 2 holes to receive asteners, we e to bottom of jambs and mullions. Head Anchors: Provide 2 anchors at head of frames exceeding 42" wide or rames mounted in steel stud walls. Head Strut Supports: Provide 3/8" x 2" vertical steel struts extending from top Of ram eat each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. Head Reinforcing: For frames over 4'-0" wide in masonry wall openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, not less than 12 -� gage for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. Rubber Door Silencers: Drill stop_ to receive 3 silencers on frames. Install p astic p ugs to keep holes clear during construction. STOPS AND MOLDINGS: Provide stops and moldings in frames to receive doors, where indicated. CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-4 Form fixed stops and molding integral with frame, unless otherwise indicated. Provide removable stops and molds where indicated or required, formed of not less than 20 gage steel sheets matching steel of frames. Secure with countersunk machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12" o.c. Form corners with butted hairline joints. Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of installation indicated. EXECUTION INSPECTION: Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which hollow metal work is to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. INSTALLATION: Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, mfr's data, and as herein specified. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Place frames at fire -rated openings in accordance with NFPA Standard No.80. Make field splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, welded and finished to match factory work. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured. ADJUST AND CLEAN: Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in o ow meta work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or amaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. END OF SECTION CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-5 SECTION 8K0 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS The general provision of the contract, including General and R-- Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on the drawings and in schedules sometimes by the abbreviation WdW or other abbreviations as indicated herein. The types of doors required include the following: r Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces. Shop priming or wood doors is included in this section. Factory -fitting to frames (prefitting) and factory -preparation for hardware (premachining) for wood doors is included in this section. Louvers for wood doors, including furnishing and installation are specified under this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE: General: Comply with the requirements of the following standards unless—otherwise indicated. Non -fire Rated Wood Doors: NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1 "Wood Flush ., oors or the ationa oodwork Mfr's Assoc. Factory mark each door with the NWMA "Quality Certified" Seal of Approval for conformance with NWMA I.S. 1. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Where fire -resistance classifications are shown or sc e u ed 7-o—F—w-05-OU door assemblies, provide doors which comply with the requirements.of NFPA No. 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows" and which have been tested and rated with single point hardware by UL. Provide UL label on each door and panel. SUBMITTALS: Mfr's Data: Submit door mfr's product data specifications and ins a anon instructions for each type of wood door required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with WOOD DOORS 8KO-1 specified requirements. Transmit copy of each instruction to the Installer. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers (if any) and similar components. Include finishing specifications for doors to receive factory -applied shop finish. Include certifications as may be required to show compliance with specifications. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating the location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. Samples: Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only. omp fiance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Submit samples for the following: Transparent Finished Doors: Submit veneer sheet from each available flitch to be -used for Premium Grade face veneers. Also submit 3 strips of solid wood 3" x 1'-0" of species to be used for exposed edges, trim and other solid wood components. Warranty: Submit written agreement in door mfr's standard form signed y the Mfr., Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped'(bow, cup or twist) or which show photographing of construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of WMA. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of acceptance. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors: Five years. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On -Site Care" recommendations of WMA pamphlet "Care and finishing of Wood Doors" and with mfr's instructions. PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: WOOD DOORS 8KO-2 General: Provide wood doors complying with the applicable requirements I.S.1 for the kinds and types of doors indicated and as further specified. Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2- or 3 -ply face panels, unless otherwise in icated. Exposed Surfaces: Provide the kind shown or scheduled and as turthe-r-'sp-e-cl-f—le-cT. Provide same exposed surface material on both faces of each door, unless otherwise indicated. Fire -rated Doors: Provide exposed faces and edges to match non- ire -rated doors in the same area of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Provide trim for openings (if any) which have been tested and listed for the kind of door and rating indicated. GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS: Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors and panels as shown. Comply with the applicable requirements of the referenced standard for the kind(s) of doors required. Light Openings: Factory cut openings. Trim openings for non - fire -rated doors with solid wood moldings of the profile shown. INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: Solid Core Wood Doors: Type II water-resistant bond. Core Construction: Solid wood block, wood particleboard, or mineral with wood oc .ocks, as required by door mfr. to comply with specified warranty period. Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2- or 3 -ply face panels. Exposed Surfaces for Transparent Finish: Where solid core interior wood doors are shown or sc edu ed to receive a transparent finish, provide mfr's standard thickness face veneers of the following quality. -- Quality: NWMA I.S.l Premium grade face veneers of the species and cut s own or scheduled. Book -match (match for color and grain) at veneer joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed edges and other exposed solid wood components of the same species as face veneers. SHOP -PRIMING: Before delivery f doors to the project site, shop -prime as follows: WOOD DOORS 8KO-3 Transparent Finish: Prime doors shown or scheduled for transparentinis with stain (if required) and other required pre -treatments and first coat of finish as specified in 917 -Series sections of these specifications. PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE: Prefit and premachine wood doors at the factory. Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for prefitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in the factory. EXECUTION INSPECTION: Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are the correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely installation of wood doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA No. 80. INSTALLATION: Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. Hardware: For installation see- 8S -Series sections of these specifications. Mfr's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with mfr's instructions and as shown. Job Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/16" in 2" at lock edge. WOOD DOORS 8KO-4 Prefit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. Clearance: For non -fire doors provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; and 112" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. For fire -rated doors, provide clearance complying with the limitations of the authority having jurisdiction. Job Site Finished Doors: See painting sections of these specs. for requirements for finis ing wood doors. �-- ADJUST AND CLEAN: Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by the Architect. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed Ty the Architect. Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required or protection of installed wood doors from damage or �-, deterioration until acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION WOOD DOORS 8KO-5 SECTLON 8S0 BUILDERS HARDWARE GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Definition: The extent of builders hardware is shown on the drawings and in sc edules. "Builders Hardware" is hereby defined to include all items known commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. The required types of builders hardware include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following: Butts and hinges Lock and latch sets Bolts Closers QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, c osers, etc.) from only one manufacturer, although several my be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, .'to Owner, Architect and Contractor. Departures From Scheduled Designations: Except as otherwise indicated, e use of one mfrs numeric designation system in schedules does not imply that another mfr's products will not be acceptable, unless they are not acceptable in design, or not equal in size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance. However, do not change the selection after Architect's acceptance of hardware supplier's completed hardware schedule. BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-1 Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in comp i-ance wi A Standard No. 80. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit mfr's technical information for each item of ar ware. include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. Wherever needed, furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to recieve finish hardware. Transmit copy of applicable data to the Installer. Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of the hardware schedule in manner and form_a_t___S_P__eC_17ied, complying with the actual construction progress schedule requirements (for each draft). Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of work. Review and acceptance by the Architect or Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. Include a separate key schedule, showing clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks have been fulfilled. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on builders hardware indicated, organized hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every it -em required for each door or opening. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work (such as hollow metal frames) -�^ which may be crucial in the project construction schedule. Furnish final draft of schedule after samples, mfr's product data sheets, coordination with sop drawings for other work, delivery schedules and similar information has been completed and accepted. PRODUCT HANDLING: Packaging of hardware, on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier form the various mfrs, sort and repackage in containers marked with the hardware set number. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the same container. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling andinstallation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the ., work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-2 JOB CONDITIONS: Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instruction in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, rames and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of hardware. PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: General: Hand of Door: The drawings show the direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door movement as shown. Mfr's Name Plate: Do not use mfr's products which have mfr's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Mfr's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated, using the mfr's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS FF -H- 106, FS FF -G-111, FS FF -H-116 and FS FF -H-121. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, gener— ally— prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. Furnish screws for installation,' with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware BUILDERS HARDWARE 850-3 finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when �. the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as �- needed or Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of builders hardware. HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS: Templates and Screws: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely of eaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: Steel Hinges: Steel pins. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. Out -swing Corridor -0oors: Non -removable pins. Interior Doors: on -rising pins. ips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hosiptal tip (HT) indicated. LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING: General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great -grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. Equip locks with mfr's standard 6 -pin tumbler cylinders. Metals• Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless s ee or nickel silver. Comply with the Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock which - is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. p- Key Material: Provide keys of nickle silver only. BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-4 P_ Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. Deliver keys to Owner's representative. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tages with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3 -way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system mfr., with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for the project. LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS: Strikes: Provide mfr's standard wrought box strike for each latch or oc o t, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set. Provide dust -proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides non -recessed strike for bolt. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by mfr. of latch and lock units. Lock Throw: Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch ob lts on rated fire openings. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2" diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless stee , with minimum 12" long rod. CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES: Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the mfr's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release and automatically close door under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders complying with UL 228. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. HARDWARE FINISHES: BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-5 Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially Possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the mfr's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch -lock sets) for color and texture. Provide finishes which match those of existing hardware. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with mfr's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by FS FF -H-106, FS FF -H-111, FS FF -H-116, FS FF -H- 121. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. Install each hardware item in compliance with the mfr's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division -9 sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to 'line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units_ which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. ADJUST AND CLEAN: Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ,.., ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-6 Final Adjustment: Whereve hardware installation is made more than one moth prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or are, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. Instruct Owner's Personnel. in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. BUILDERS HARDWARE SCHEDULE Heading l Door 1 Each to have: 1 1/2 pr. Butts TZ2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 McKinney 1 Lockset 88-8G16 Sargent 1 Stop W1276CS Trimco 1 Closer EN350-0 Sargent Heading 2 Doors 2* Each to have: 1 1/2 pr. Butts TZ2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 McKinney 1 Lockset 88-8U15 Sargent Heading 3 Doors 3*, 6*, 7* Each to have: 1 1/2 pr. Butts TZ2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 McKinney 1 Lockset 88-8GO5 Sargent 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco Heading 4 Doors 4, 8 Each to have: 1 1/2 pr. Butts TZ2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 McKinney 1 Lockset 88-8015 Sargent 1 Closer EN350-0 Sargent *Note: Use of applicable existing hardware on existing doors to be re -used is acceptable. END OF SECTION BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-7 SECTION 9C7 GENERAL r RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the �- work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of predecorated gypsum board work is shown on the drawings and in schedules. The types of predecorated gypsum board required include the following: Vinyl -film -faced gypsum board panels. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Fire -Resistance Rating: Where work is indicated for fire -resistance ratings, including t ose requied to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including UL and AIA. - Allowable Tolerance: 1/16" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4" in 8 -0 for p umb, level, warp and bow. Manufacturer: Obtain predecorated gypsum boards, trim accessories, a esives and joint products from a single mfr., or from mfrs recommended by the prime mfr of gypsum boards. SUBMITTALS: Mfr's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of mfr's product specifications and installation instructions for each predecorated component, including maintenance instructions and other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Distribute an additional copy of each installation instruction to the Installer. Samples: Submit 3, 12" sq. samples of each colorand texture of predecorated gypsum board required, and 3 units of 24�� lengths of each predecorated accessory or trim strip required with each board selection. Sample submittal and Architect's review will be for color, pattern and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. PRODUCT HANDLING: PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-1 Deliver materials in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with mfr's name, brand, type and grade; store in a dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground. JOB CONDITIONS: Installer must examine the substrates and the spaces to receive predecorated gypsum board, and the conditions under which the work is to be performed, and shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. PRODUCTS PREDECORATED MATERIALS: Vinyl -Faced Gypsum Boards: Gypsum board of the thickness indicated complying with ASTM C 36, with factory -laminated vinyl face. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread of 25, fuel contribution of 15 and smoke developed of 35; ASTM E 84. Vinyl Face: Vinyl film not less than 6 mils thick, on cloth acting. Long Edge Profile:. Tapered and rounded edges, with non -laminated integral vinyl flaps extending beyond edges (for trimming). Thickness: 1/2", where indicated. Thickness: 5/8" where indicated. Type X: Provide where indicated (-X), and where required for ire -resistance rating. Texture and Color: As selected by Architect from mfr's standard textures and co ors, match existing. Mfr.: The following produce vinyl -faced gypsum board panels complying with the requirements: The Flintkote, co.; Georgia-Pacific Corp.; Gold Bond Building Products Div.; Kaiser Gypsum Co.; US Gypsum Co. Predecorated Trim Accessories: Mfr's standard units of the type and pro i e indicated, matching t e finish color, pattern and texture of the predecorated gypsum board. Snap-On Type: Galvanized retainer strips and snap -on predecorated molded p astic trim strips, including external corner strips. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: EDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-2 Joint Treatment Materials: Drywall joint compound complying with ASTM , of ype recommended by the predecorated gypsum board mfr. Concealed Fasteners: Types and sizes recommended by predecorated gypsum oar m r, but not less than screw-type fasteners where board is over metal supports. Adhesives: Provide types of laminating and fastening adhesives recommended by predecorated.gypsum board mfr.; either liquid form or preformed foam-tape adhesives. EXECUTION PREPARATIONS FOR INSTALLATION: Pre-Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the ins a ers o related wor and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum board has been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings, supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed. ... Plan layout and coordination of exposed joints to provide best visual effect within each space, and to coordinate with building expansion joints and other interruptions of the work. INSTALLATION OF PREDECORATED BOARDS: General: Comply with mfr's instructions and recommendations which are appFicaM e to the work indicated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated or required by governing regulations or for indicated fire-resistance ratings. Isolate perimeter of work from abutment with structure, by use of space and trim accessories of the types indicated. Install wall and partitions boards with vertical joints, and stagger joints with joints in backing boards where multi-layered applications are indicated. For single-layered applications, stagger joints with joints on opposite side of partitions. Install vinyl-faced boards by adhesive fastening of board to other supports and substrate areas. Fasten loose flap type boards by nailing or screwing at long edges, under the flaps, prior to joint-compound treatment, bonding and trimming of flaps. Fasten central areas of boards with contact-type adhesive. Exposed Butt-Joint System: Except where top, bottom and edges can be tastened with co-Kc-e-Me-T fasteners, fasten boards entirely with adhesive. Butt exposed edges tightly without forcing, for uniform appearance of seams. PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-3 .0W Matched Finish Areas: Where wall surfaces are excessively disrupted by penetrating services or unusual profiles which cannot be successfully covered by predecorated gypsum board, install plain gypsum board or backing board of same thickness, including drywall treatment or joints and fasteners as may be necessary to produce a smooth, joint -free base for finishing. Cover area with adhesively applied matching vinyl wallcovering, with seams coordinated to produce best possible visual effect. Install predecorated trim accessories where shown and elsewhere as indicated to conceal fasteners and board edges, and comply with mfr's instructions for securing trim units and jointing trim at intersections and joints in running trim. Provide trim in lengths (longest lengths available) which will minimize the number of running trim joints. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Save scraps of predecorated board which are more than 8" wide and more than 3 sq. ft. in area, and save scraps of predecorated trim accessories which are more than 2' long. Wrap or bundle scraps for storage, and deliver as directed to Owner's representative. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation. Clean dust, excess adhesive, marks and other compounds and stains from exposed faces of the work; comply with mfr's instructions. Protections: The Installer of predecorated gypsum board shall advise the Contractor of required procedures for protection of the work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-4 SECTION 9DO GYPSUM DRYWALL GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of the gypsum drywall work (GypDw) is shown on the drawings and in schedules, and is hereby defined to include gypsum board work with a tape -and -compound joint treatment system known as "drywall finishing" work. The types of work required include the following: Gypsum drywall including screw-type metal support system. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Fire -Resistance Rating: Where work is indicated for fire -resistance ratings, including t ose required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including UL and AIA. Industry Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of GA -216 pp ication and Finishing of Gypsum Board" by the Gypsum Association, except where more detailed or more stringent requirements are indicated including the recommendations of the manufacturer. Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and in 8'-0" or plumb, level, warp and bow. Manufacturer: Obtain gypsum boards, trim accessories, adhesives and �-, point treatment products from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturer's recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. SUBMITTALS - Manufacturer's Data, Gypsum Drywall: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as may be required to show compliance �. with these specifications. Distribute an additional copy of each installation instruction to the Installer. GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-1 PRODUCT HANDLING: Deliver gypsum drywall materials in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade; store in a dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground. JOB CONDITIONS: Installer must examine the substrates and the spaces to receive gypsum drywall, and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be installed; and shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55 degrees F., for the period of 24 hours before drywall finishing, during installation and until compounds are dry. PRODUCTS METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS: General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with Gypsum ss7� ociation Specification GA -203 "Installation of Screw -Type Steel Framing Members to Receive GypsumBoard" (as specified and recommended) for metal system supporting gypsum drywall work. Studs: ASTM C 645; 25 gage X 2 1/2" deep, except as otherwise in icated. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work. Stud System Accessories: Provide stud manufacturer's standard clips, shoes, ties, reinforcements, fasteners and other accessories as needed for a complete stud system. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 25 gage, hat -shaped. Fasteners: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer for e substrate and application indicated. GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS: General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with GA -216 as specified and recommended. Gypsum Board (GypBd): (Also known as gypsum wallboard.) Regular type With tapered long edges. GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-2 0— Sheet Size: Maximum length available which will minimize end joints. Thickness: 5/8", except where otherwise indicated. Type X: Provide where indicated (fire -resistive). TRIM ACCESSORIES: General: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel semi -finishing type TTT-ange not concealed) where indicated. -- MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically recommended for laminating gypsum boards. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Mastic type; non -shrinking, non-drying, non -migrating and non -staining. Exposed Acoustical Sealant: Latex, acrylic, or acrylic -latex type; permanently elastic an paintable. Sound Attenuation Blankets: FS HH -I-521, Type I; semi-rigid mineral fiber an et wit out mem rane, Class 25 flame -spread, thicknesses as indicated. EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS: General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with GA -203, and manufacturer's instructions. Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips, and similar devices to other trades for installation well_ in advance of time needed for �. coordination with other work. Do not bridge building expansion joints (ExpJt) with support system, frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as indicated. Isolate stud system from transfer to structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. Install runner tracks at floors, ceiling and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work. GYPSUM DRYWALL 9D90-3 Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as indicated to the structural support or substrate above the ceiling. Space studs 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. Door Frames: Install additional jamb studs at door frames as indicated, -Fut not less than 2 studs at each jamb. Space jack studs over door frames at same spacing as partition studs. Space wall furring members 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. Nail or screw furring members to structural support where possible; otherwise wire -tie or clip as recommended by manufacturer. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring, blocking and bracing at opening and terminations in the work, and at locations required to support fixtures, equipments, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on gypsum board alone. GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Pre -Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the instaTlers of relate work and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum drywall has been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings, supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed. Install sound attenuation blankets as indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. General Standards: In addition to compliance with GA -216, comply with manufacturer's in and requirements for fire -resistance ratings (if any), whichever is most stringent. Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end -butt joints wherever possible. Form control joints (CtrJt) and expansion joints (ExpJt) with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with J -type semi - finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer installgypsum board with "floating" internal corner construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated or unless control or expansion joints are indicated. GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-4 Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with GA -216 and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. SPECIAL GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATIONS: Double -Layer Walls and Partitions: Install base layer of gypsum backing board and face layer of exposed gypsum board, both vertically and with joints offset at least 10". Fasten base layer with screws, or with nails where permitted. Laminate face layer to base layer with laminating adhesive, and supplement with either temporary or permanent screws, or nails where permitted, through base layer and into supports. INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. "~ Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Install J -type semi -finishing trim where indicated, and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings. PROTECTION OF WORK: r Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection of the gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-5 SECTION 9E0 ACOUSTICAL GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions Supplementary Conditions (if any), section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: of Contract, including General and apply to work specified in this Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling (AcClg) is shown on the drawings and in schedules. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Subcontract the installation of acoustical ceilings to an experienced installation firm which is acceptable to the manufacturer of the acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from the manufacturer. Standards for Terminology and Performance: Applicable publications by the Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association (AIMA), including "Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical Materials". CIIRMTTTAI S - Manufacturer's Data, Acoustical Ceilings: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. Distribute one additional copy of each installation instruction to the Installer. Include manufacturer's- recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performances. Samples, Acoustical Ceilings: ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-1 Submit 3 sets of 12" square samples for each acoustical unit required. In each set of samples show the full range of exposed color and texture .,. to be expected in completed work. Sample submittal and Architect's review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Submit 3 12" long samples of each exposed runner and molding. Architects' review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Maintenance Stock, Acoustical Ceilings: At time of completing the installation, deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish full size units matching the units installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels. Acoustical Units: Furnish an amount equal to 1.0% of the amount insta e . JOB CONDITIONS: Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space has been enclosed and weather -tight, and until wet -work in space has been completed and nominally dry, and until work above ceilings is complete, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PRODUCTS CEILING UNITS: Acoustical Panels (AcPnl): General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's. standard lay -in panels of the type recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Provide sizes shown by reflected ceiling plans or, if not otherwise indicated, 24" x 48" grid -size panels. Provide white washable finish. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Panels (MnAcPnl): Provide units not less than 5/811 thisthiCK and of density not less t an 10 lbs. per cu. ft., medium - coarse non -directional texture, NRC 0.50 to 0.60, STC 30-34, light reflectance over 75%. Match texture and color to existing. r- Products: Provide one of the following or approved equal: Minabord Cortege, by Armstrong Cork Co. Natural Fissured II, US Gypsum Co. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-2 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS: General: Comply with ASTM C 635, as applicable to the type of suspension system required for the type of ceiling units indicated. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through the ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition system (if any). Structural Class: Intermediate -duty system. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung. Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretc ed, yield -stress load of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 12 gage (0.106"). Type of System: Either direct -hung or indirect -hung suspension system, at Contractor's option. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 steel channels, hot -rolled or cold- rolled, old- ro e , not less than 0.475 lbs. per lin. ft. System Manufacturer: Same as acoustical unit manufacturer or one of the following: Chicago Metalic Corp. Donn Products, Inc. Flangeklamp Industries Inc. Howmet Corp. Lok Products Co. Mid -Western Industries. National Rolling Mills Co. Roper Eastern Bldg. Systems. Edge Moldings: Manufacturer's standard channel molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling, with a single flange of molding exposed, color to match existing. Access: Manufacturer's standard total access system, either up - acting or down -acting (each 12 x 24 unit independently removable). Exposed Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard exposed runners, cross -runners, and accessories, of the types and profiles indicated, with exposed cross runners coped to lay flush with main runners. Finish of Exposed Members: Provide uniform factory -applied finish... on exposed surfaces of ceiling suspension system including moldings, trim and accessories. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish, color toma ch existing. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: Tile Joint Splines: Type recommended by tile manufacturer to coordinate with ti a installation support system and installation procedure. Edge Trim Moldings: Metal or extruded PVC plastic, of types and profiles indicated, color to match existing. -- Acoustical Sealant: A heavy -bodied, non -shrinking, non-drying, non -sag grade mastic compound intended for interior sealing of concealed construction joints. Concrete Attachment: Type recommended by suspension system manu acturer, sized for pull-out resistance of not less than 5 -times the hanger design load for structural classification indicated (ASTM C '~ 635, Table 1, Direct Hung). EXECUTION INSPECTION AND.PREPARATION WORK: .^ Supports in Metal Decking: Furnish layout of required clips or slots to decking installer we in advance of decking installation. Installer must examine the conditions under which the acoustical ceiling work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid the use of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. -- INSTALLATION: General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer: -'s printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations, fire -resistance ~' rating requirements as indicated, and industry standards applicable to the work. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. �- Install tile with pattern running in one direction. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members as indicated. Locate hangers near each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9E90-4 Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -typing, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for the substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. Install edge moldings of the type indicated at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of work. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concea ed on back of vertical leg before fastening to vertical surface. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening with screw - anchors into the substrate, through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3" from each end and not more than 16" o.c. along each molding. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners of moldings accurately to provide hair -line joints, securely connected to prevent dislocation. Cope exposed flanges of intersecting suspension system members, so that flange faces will be flush (cope flange of member supported by other member). Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension system. Place splines or flanges of suspension system into kerfed edges, or insert tile tongues into tile grooves, so that every tile -to -tile joint is closed by a double lap of material. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in both directions, unless otherwise shown. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and around work which penetrates ceiling. Fabricate access units (which have not been factory -fabricated) from special suspension system access members and same acoustic tile units used in remainder of ceiling. Modify edges of tile as required to allow for removal of access units. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Install hold-down clips for --each panel, spaced as recommended by panel manufacturer for the application indicated, except do not exceed spacings required by governing regulations or for fire - resistance ratings. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-5 Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas where required by governing regulations or for fire -resistance ratings; -, space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at penetrations. Install edge trim moldings where indicated, and elsewhere as needed to conceal edges of acoustical units which would otherwise be exposed to view after completion of the work. Anchor with fasteners or, if not Possible, secure in place with permanent adhesive. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. The Installer shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the acoustical ceilings, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-6 SECTION 9RO CARPETING GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of carpeting is indicated on the drawings, and includes carpet, cushion and accessories. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Installer: Firm with not less than 2 years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. Manufacturer: Firm with not less than 5 years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this section; and whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of product with requirements of this section. General Standard: Comply with recommendation of "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" y The Carpet and Rug Institute, which can be reasonably applied to types of carpeting required. Overrun: Where carpet is supplied from custom run at mill, provide 5% overrun on calculated yardage (carpet needed for proper installation including waste and excess usable scraps). Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun (if any) and usable scraps of carpet toOwner's designated storage space, properly packaged and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9'-0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than 8" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces. SURMT UALS : Manufacturer's Data: Submit data to show compliance with requirements. Include test laboratory reports and mfr's certifications and installation/maintenance instructions and recommendations. Samples: Submit 18" X 27" samples of each carpet required, and 6":. lengths of exposed edge stripping, and 6" squares of separate cushions. CARPETING 9RO-1 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. WARRANTY: Provide special lifetime warranty against edge ravel, signed y Cb- ontractor, Installer and Mfr. (Carpet Mill), agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of carpeting work during 1 - year warranty period following acceptance. Attach copies of product warranties. PRODUCTS: CARPET: Mohawk Supertron: Weave: Woven Interlock Pitch: 165 POB Rows per Inch: 9.0 �- Pile Height: .230" Finished Face Yarn: 100% Antron Continuous Filament Nylon with Static Control Ply: 4 Dye Method: Singles/Yarn Dyed Max. Dye Lot: Approx. 20,000 sq. yds. Yarn Weight/Woven: 30.0 oz. per sq. yd. Backing Material: Synthetic ^^ Density: 4,706 Weight Density: 134,121 Carpet Color, Pattern, Texture: General: Unless otherwise indicated or shown on data sheets, match existing -carpet for control/selection of color, pattern and texture. CARPET CUSHIONS: Provide mfr's standard carpet cushion of type, weight and tic ness indicated. Refer to drawings for space -to -space variations (if any) in carpet cushion requirements. Provide cushion which passes pill test for flammability, ASTM D 2859 (DOC FF -1-70). Flat Sponge Rubber Carpet Cushion: 1/4" 68 ounce flat of low -profile waffle faced sponge rubber with top surface of fabric of other smooth sheet; FS ZZ -C-00811. CARPET ACCESSORIES: Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood strips, either 3/8" or 9/3211 t fc as required to match cushion thickness, with angular pins protruding from top designed to grip and hold stretched carpet at CARPETING 9RO-2 the backing. Provide narrow stripping with 2 rows of pinis where stretched width of carpet is 20' or less; wide stripping with 3 rows of pins where carpet width exceeds 20'. Carpet Edge Guard, Metal: Extruded aluminum bend -down type edge guard, with concealed gripper teeth and punched anchorage flange; anodized aluminum finish of colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry (any mfr.). Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended y carpet mfr., for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss as seams. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by mfrs of carpet, cushions and other carpeting products; and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. EXECUTION PRE -INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Installer must examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize the possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during the remainder of the construction period. INSTALLATION: General: Comply with mfr's instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not seam in traffic direction at doorways. Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. Expansion Joints: Do not bri--dge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting, provide for movement. Stretch-in-tackless Installation: CARPETING 9RO-3 Install tackless carpet stripping with adhesive or by nailing, or both where required for adequate strength. Locate properly for concealment •— of carpet edge between stripping and base of wall. Strip entire perimeter of each carpeted space, and where possible at obstructions and cutouts. Install cushion of type indicated in each space to be carpeted. Run seams at 90 degree angle with carpet seams. Place cushion with fabric covered or smoothest face up. Apply 2" fabric -type adhesive tape on cushion seams. Cement cushion to substrate in manner recommended by mfr., except staple to wood substrates (if any). Install carpet by trimming edges, buttering cuts with seaming cement, taping or sewing or taping -and -sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet. Apply seaming cement over stitching on backing, if not covered by tape. Stretch carpet both directions, the exact amount recommended by carpet mfr.; trim edges, secure to stripping, and conceal behind edge of �- stripping. Use powe stretchers where sufficient space is available to operate stretchers properly. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Remove debris, sorting pieces. to be saved rom scraps to disposed of. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. ^^ Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Advise Contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of acceptance. Re -stretching: Return to installation after approximately 6 months of occupancy and use; retretch carpet in each space, repair faults in seaming, trim and adjust carpeting at edges. END OF SECTION CARPETING 9RO-4 SECTION 9T0 PAINFING GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to the work `specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of the work. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. PAINTING NOT INCLUDED: The following categories of work are not included as part of the field - applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. Also, shop -fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories. Mechanical and Electrical Work: The painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Division 15 & 16, respectively. Pre -finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting whenfactory-finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) acoustic materials, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and.. generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, c romium.plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. PAINTING 9TO-1 Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. SUBMITTALS: Manufacturer's Data: Submit mfr's technical information including paint a e ana ysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Samples: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. ovide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. On 12"x12" hardboard, provide two samples of each material, with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of each natural and stained wood finish as required. Label and identify each as to location and application. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing mfr's name and label, and the following information. Name or title of material. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. Mfr's stock number and date of mfr. Mfr's name. Contents by volume,.for major pigment and vehicle. Constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. JOB CONDITIONS: Apply water -base paints only when the temperature of surfaces to a painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint — mfr's printed instructions. Apply solvent -thinned paints only -when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees .� F. and 95 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint mfr's printed instructions. PAINTING 9TO-2 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint mfr's printed instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint mfr. during application and drying periods. PRODUCTS: COLORS AND FINISHES: Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in Fte "schedules" of the contract documents. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. MATERIAL QUALITY: Provide best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials mfr's. Materials not displaying the mfr's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of the named mfrs. are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other mfrs. Federal Specifications establish the minimum acceptable quality for paint materials. Provide a written certification from the paint mfr. that materials provided meet or exceed these minimums. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same mfr. as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by�- the paint mfr., and use only within recommended limits. PAINTING 9TO-3 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS: �. Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Ferrous Metal: IPS -20: 1st Coat - Red lead primer (TT -P-86). 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoater (TT -E-543). 3rd Coat - Semi -gloss enamel (TT -E-509). First coat not required on items that are shop primed. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. Zinc -Coated Metal: IPS -23: 1st Coat - Zinc dust -zinc oxide primer (TT -P-641). 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoat (TT -E-543). 3rd Coat - Semi -gloss enamel (TT -E-509). Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. Stained Woodwork: IPS -27: 1st Coat - Interior oil stain (TT -S-711). 2nd Coat - Bleached shellac (TT -S-300). 3rd Coat - Rubbing varnish (TT -V-86). 4th Coat - Rubbing Varnish (TT -V-86). �,. Fill open. grained wood with filler complying with RR -F- 336, and wipe before first varnish coat. EXECUTION: INSPFCTTnm Applicator must examine the area and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. ,— Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Applicator. Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator's - acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. SURFACE PREPARATIONS: General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accor ance with the paint mfr's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate conditions. PAINTING 9TO-4 Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and. not to be finish - painted, or provide surface -applies protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces. W ood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil, or other oreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of the priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood -filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling, etc. When transparent finish .is required, use spar varnish for backpriming. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. Ferrous metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Touch-up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with the same type shop primer. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with an acceptable n -petroleum based solvent. MATERIALS PREPARATION: Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with mfr's directions. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers..:_ Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. PAINTING 9TO-5 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and if necessary, strain the material before using. APPLICATION: General: Apply paint in accordance with the mfr's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of material being applied. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently -fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before of equipment. final installation Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non -specular black paint. Paint the back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop - primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated. Scheduling Painting: Apply the first -coat material to surfaces that have been c eane , pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint. does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material at not less than the m r s recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating mfr. PAINTING 9TO-6 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION: Clean-up: During the progress of the work, remove from the site of all isc�a paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. Upon completion of painting work clean window glass and other paint - spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. Protection: protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or no ,against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as'acceptable to the Architect. Provide '%4 et Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION PAINTING 9TO-7 SECTION 15A MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL -MER -AU PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1 The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 of the specifications apply to the work specified in this Division as well as Division 16. 1.2 All work covered by this Section of the Specifications shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable provisions of the Contract Documents and any addenda or directive which may be issued. -.. 2. GENERAL: 2.1 The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, materials, etc. and shall perform all operations in connection with the installation of Mechanical and Electrical work in accordance with these Contract Documents. 2.2 The Contractor shall execute all work specified or indicated on accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems, whether or not mentioned specifically mentioned. 2.3 Every contractor shall be responsible for all his work fitting into place in a satisfactory and" neat workmanlike manner in every: particular to the approval of the Owner. 2.4 Confer with the General Contractor and other Contractors regarding -� the location and size of pipes, equipment, fixtures, conduit, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, etc., in order that there be no interferences between the installation or progress of the work of any Contractor on the project. 2.5 The Mechanical and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building and the work of other trades will allow. All changes from Drawings necessary to make the work of each Contractor conform to the building construction and the work of other trades shall be done at the appropriate Contractor's expense. 2.6 SHOULD ANY BIDDER CONSIDER THAT ANY REQUIREMENT OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS WILL MAKE THE EFFECTIVE OPERATION OF ANY PORTION OR THE WHOLE INSTALLATION IMPOSSIBLE, OR IF HE FEEL A VITAL COMPONENT HAS BEEN OMITTED; HE MUST DESCRIBE IN HIS BID CHANGES HE DEEMS NECESSARY. FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS AN AGREEMENT 15A-1 ON THE PART OF THE BIDDER TO GUARANTEE THE EFFECTIVE OPERATION OF THE INSTALLATION. 2.7 All equipment shall be installed complete with all necessary fittings, supports, accessories, etc., as necessary for a complete installation, providing the desired function. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure unless specifically stated otherwise. 2.8 Nothing in these specifications or drawings shall be construed as directing any contractor from deviating from any legally binding code or ordinance. 3. DEMOLITION: 3.1 Demolition shall be complete so that when any major component (such as light fixture, switch, etc.) is removed, the accompanying miscellaneous items (such as supports, wire, conduit, etc.) are also removed. 3.2 All receptacles (in the area of this project) are believed to be connected to the indicated panelboard "BL". Test all circuits carefully to confirm this before touching any "live" element. Ensure that no light fixture or receptacle (which is to remain) is left without power at the end of this project. BIDDERS MUST INCLUDE THIS IN THEIR BID. 3.3 Existing components which are to be reused shall be stored in a safe location so that no damage occurs. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF PRE- EXISTING DAMAGE (IF ANY) PRIOR TO TOUCHING ANY SUCH COMPONENT. Any damage discovered at the end of the project, which was not previously identified will be assumed to be the result of the construction process and shall be paid for at the cost of the Contractor. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 General: The Contractor is required to submit four copies of the following general types of information: Certificates. Shop drawings/component data. Maintenance manual. Warrantees. 4.2 Certificates: The Contractor is required to submit to the Engineer the following certificates: 4.2.1 Certificate of Approval: Contractor shall review all required components for use in this application to ascertain that all items will function as necessary and as designed. Contractor shall include with his equipment submittal a certification that this review has been 15A-2 ?p^A accomplished. The required certificate is included at the back of this section. 4.2.2 Certificate of Owner instruction: This certificate is required prior to project closeout. This certificate shall be signed by the Owner. See paragraphs 8 and 10 this section for additional information -° on this certificate. The required certificate is included at the back of this section. 4.2.3 Certificate of Receipt of Loose Items: This certificate is required to ensure that Owner has received all required loose items. This certificate shall be signed by the Owner. The required certificate is included at the back of this section. 4.3 Shop Drawings/Component Data: Submittals shall follow the following format: 4.3.1 Submittals shall be assembled in three -hole pressboard cover (Smead No. Br129 or equal) with Acco fasteners and compressors. 4.3.2 Submittal booklet shall be labeled on the outside as "Mechanical SUbmittal" or as "Electrical Submittal". ' 4.3.3 Provide tabbed dividers for each specification section for which information is required. For example, provide dividers with "15250", "15651", etc. tabs. 4.3.4 The first page in each divider shall be the Contractor's Submittal Certificate. 4.4 Maintenance Manuals: Furnish for approval three complete Maintenance Manuals for all materials and equipment. Manuals shall follow the following format: 4.4.1 Each manual shall include: Approved shop drawings. Wiring diagrams. Operating instructions. Lubrication instructions. Maintenance instructions. Parts lists. Test reports. 4.4.2 Manuals shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer's office prior to the date of final inspection. 4.4.3 Each manual shall be 8 1/2" x 11" and bound in a 3 ring binder. Provide tabbed dividers labeled with the above divisions. 4.5 Warranties: See Division 1 for information on warranties. 15A-3 5. OPENINGS AND SLEEVES IN CONSTRUCTION: 5.1 Most openings required in wall, floor, roof, ceiling, etc, construction for Mechanical and Electrical Work will be provided by the General Contractor in accordance with information furnished by the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors. All sleeves, inserts, forms etc., required for openings shall be furnished by the Contractor requiring same. The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall be responsible for their size, fabrication, and location. Installation will be by General Contractor. Where new work has been installed previous to such request, the General Contractor will do the necessary cutting and patching at the expense of the Mechanical and Electrical Contractor. 6. PROTECTING SITE: 6.1 Provide adequate barricades, construction signs, torches, red lanterns, guards, etc., as required during the progress of the work. Observe all applicable regulations respecting safety provision, barricades, etc. 6.2 Protect utilities, trees, shrubbery, fences, poles, sidewalks, curbs and all other property and surface structures from damage. Any items which are disturbed shall be restored by the Contractor at his own expense. 6.3 Whenever work damages streets, lawns, sidewalks, parking areas, curbs or other finished surfaces, replace such surfaces with material to match existing surfaces as^ approved by proper authorities,: including reinforcing steel where required. 6.4 Whenever work damages existing grassed areas, contractor shall install sod to match existing. 7. MECHANICAL -ELECTRICAL COORDINATION: 7.1 Unless otherwise specified the Electrical Contractor will furnish and install all conduit, wiring, disconnects, starters,, thermal overload heaters, holding coils, remote pushbutton stations, Nand -Off - Auto and multi -speed switches, and pilot lights for all electrically operated mechanical equipment, including final connections leaving items ready for operation. 7.2 Where starters are an integral part of the equipment the Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring and make all final connections to the line side of the starter or disconnect device. All wiring beyond this point shall be by the mechanical contractor furnishing the motor. 15A-4 7.3 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all control devices such as thermostats, pressure sensors, humidistats, etc. associated with the mechanical equipment, and shall install those items which due to their method of operation must be connected or integrated into the equipment. Items not attached to mechanical equipment, duct or piping shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring for ~° mechanical control shall be provided and installed by the Electrical Contractor, regardless of who installed the device. Control diagrams shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. 7.4 Each contractor shall consult with the Electrical Contractor before ordering or installing equipment, to coordinate the motor, starter, holding coil, overload, interlocks, etc. and shall be equally responsible to insure that the equipment installed is of proper size and type. 7.5 After wiring is completed by the Electrical Contractor, each Mechanical Contractor shall inspect the appropriate wiring before motors are operated. If any discrepancies are discovered the Mechanical Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing. The Owner shall arrange to have the changes made as required. After any required changes are complete, the Mechanical Contractor who furnished the motor shall assume complete responsibility for motor protection during the warranty period including initial startup of each motor. 8. CONCRETE WORK AND PADS: 8.1 All concreting, reinforcing, and form work necessary in connection with the construction of pads and the concreting around ducts or raceways shall be provided by the mechanical or electrical contractor,: as appropriate. 9. OWNER INSTRUCTION: 9.1 Each contractor shall instruct the Owner's representative in the operation and maintenance of each system. Instruction periods shall 4,, include as a minimum 2 visits of 8 hours per visit. These visits shall be at the convenience of the Owner. Submit a letter signed by the Owner certifying satisfactory completion of instructional activities. 10. FINAL INSPECTION: 10.1 Final inspection will be made only after the Contractor certifies in writing that the work is 100% complete. 10.2 A representative from each Contractor and sub -Contractor shall be present and shall be prepared to assist the Owner/Engineer in performing the inspection. This shall include the operation of all equipment items, the removal of inspection panels/doors(as requested), etc. 15A-5 10.3 An inspection report describing incomplete/or unacceptable work will be prepared. This will be reviewed with the Contractor at the project site. 10.4 After the incomplete or unacceptable work is 100% corrected the Contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner. 11. PROJECT CLOSEOUT: 11.1 The following requirements must be fully completed before the final application for payment will be accepted or approved. 11.1.1 Final inspection performed and all corrections made. 11.1.2 Submittal of: Maintenance manual. Owner instruction certification letter. Equipment warrantees. Written receipt for all loose items. 15A-6 CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL OF SUBMITTED ITEMS I, authorized representative of (company), has reviewed these submittals and find them to be acceptable for the application intended and approve them for this project. signed• title: date: 15A-7 CERTIFICATE OF OWNER INSTRUCTION) I, , authorized representative of (Owner), have received hours of instruction concerning the project. signed: title: company: signed: title: company: date: 15A-8 (Owner) (Owner) (Owner) (Contractor) (Cont Tactor ) (Cont ractor ) CERTIFICATE OF RECEIPT OF LOOSE ITEMS I, authorized representative of (Owner), have received all required loose items associated with the project. signed: (Owner) title: (Owner) company: (Owner) signed: (Cont ractor ) title: (Contractor) company: (Contractor) date• END OF SECTION 15A 15A-9 SECTION 15B MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: Plastic pipe Markers. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit product specifications and installation instructions for each identification material and device required. 3.2 Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material. 3.3 Maintenance Material: Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required, including additional numbered tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system identification markers and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 4.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division -15 sections. 4.2 Plastic Pipe Markers: 4.2.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color -coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI 13.1. 4.2.2 Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 deg F or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker. 15B-1 4.2.3 Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 (including insulation, if any), provide full -band markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by either snap -on application (pre -tensioned plastic pipe marker) or strapped to pipe with manufacturer's standard stainless-steel bands. 4.2.4 Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation, if any), provide either full -band or strip -type (not narrower than three times letter height) fastened to pipe with manufacturer's standard stainless steel band. 4.3 Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, 4 schedule or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 4.4 Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow. 5. LETTERING AND GRAPHICS 5.1 General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 6. APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: 6.1 General Installation Requirements: Install identification materials after all painting and/or covering is completed. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings, etc. 6.2 Piping System Identification: Install pipe markers on new HWS and HWR piping and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. 6.2.1 Location: Install markers as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces and exterior non -concealed locations. 6.2.1.1 Near each valve and control device. 6.2.1.2 Near each branch, excluding short take -offs. Mark each pipe at branch where there could be any question of flow pattern. 6.2.1.3 Near locations where pipes pass through floors/walls/ceilings, or enter non -accessible enclosures. 15B-2 6.2.1.4 At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 6.2.1.5 Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6.2.1.6 Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas. 6.2.1.7 On piping above removable ceilings. END OF SECTION 15B 15B-3 SECTION 15C PIPE, TUBE, AND FI TINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Components specified in this section include the following: Piping Materials. Pipe/Tube Fittings. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products. Piping Specialities. 2. SUBMITTALS: ... 2.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe, tube, and fitting. 3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 3.1 Except for hub -and -spigot and similar units of pipe, provide factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe -end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. 3.2 Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. 3.3 Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. - PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. PIPING MATERIALS: 4.1 General: Provide pipe material indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements and comply with ti governing regulations and industry standards. Piping components shall be as follows. , 4.2 Black Steel Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120. 15C-1 5. PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS: 5.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated fittings of type indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Fittings shall be as follows. 5.2 Steel Pipe: 5.2.1 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. 5.2.2 Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5; Butt welding(weld-neck); Raised - face. Wrought steel butt -welding. 5.2.3 Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close -nipples). 6. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS: 6.1 Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised -face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 6.2 Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non -Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 7. PIPING SPECIALITIES: 7.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. 7.2 Dielectric Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. 7.3 Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 7.3.1 Sheet -Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded 15C-2 ti longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6", 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage. 7.3.2 Plastic -Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. ~' 7.4 Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls of the following material: 7.4.1 Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeves connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 8. PIPE INSTALLATION: 8.1 Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently -leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. 8.2 Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described be diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. 8.3 Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 112" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. 8.4 Where possible, locate insulated piping in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. 8.5 Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. 15C-3 9. PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: 9.1 Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. 9.2 Threaded Pipe: 9.2.1 Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI 62.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove butts and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. 9.3 Flanged Joints: 9.3.1 Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. 10. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: 10.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with.adjoining surface. 10.2 Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation: instructions. 10.3 Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. 10.3.1 Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor - barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. 10.3.2 Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. 15C-4 15C-5 10.3.3 Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 10.3.4 Install sheet -metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. 10.3.5 Install plastic -pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated. 10.4 Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: 10.4.1 Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal. 11. CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING: 11.1 General: Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required test. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. .., 12. PIPING TESTS: 12.1 All Piping Tests: 12.1.1 Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. 12.1.2 Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test all below - grade piping before backfill, NO EXCEPTIONS. 12.1.3 Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. 12.1.4 Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceed 5% of test pressure, unless notes otherwise below. 12.2 Heating -Water Piping Test: 12.2.1 Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. Required test period is 2 hours. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi test pressure. 12.3 Repairs: Repair or replace piping by disassembly and reinstallation, using new materials to the extent required to. eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do 15C-5 not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. END OF SECTION 15C 15C-6 SECTION 15D SUPPORTS, AN ORS, N S PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Typesof supports, anchors, and seals specified in this section include the following: Insulated Piping Supports. Non -Insulated Piping Supports. Intermediate Components. Building Attachments. Speciality Supports. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE 2.1 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports, anchors, and seals. 2.2 MSS Standard Compliance: 2.2.1 Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with ANSI/MSS SP -58. 2.2.2 Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP -69. 2.2.3 Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP -89. 3. SUBMITTALS: �-= 3.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of support, anchor, and seal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 4.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP 58, of one of the MSS �- types listed. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with .,. saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper -plated hangers and supports for copper -piping systems. 15D-1 4.2 Insulated Piping Supports: Auto -Grip insul-speed hanger; Fee and Mason fig. 800. 4.3 Non -Insulated Piping Supports: 4.3.1 Copper Piping: Auto -Grip Swivel Ring Hanger, Fee and Mason fig. 500. 4.3.2 Non -Copper Piping: Auto -Grip Swivel Ring Hanger, Fee and Mason fig. 400. 4.3.3 Two -Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8, Fee and Mason fig. 241. 4.4 Intermediate Components: Threaded Rod, Fee and Mason figs. 267, 267AL or 263 as appropriate. 4.5 Building Attachments: 4.5.1 Rod Attachment Concrete Plate: Equal to B -Line. Figure B 3085. 4.6 Speciality Supports: 4.6.1 Trapeze Hangers: For multiple -parallel pipe lines use manufactured trapeze -type hanger equal to "Uni-strut". Provide pipe clamp for each pipe, sized to fit around pipe AND insulation. 4.6.2 Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 5. INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS: 5.1 Building Attachments: Install building attachments at required locations for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP -69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 5.1.1 On projects requiring installation of building attachments into existing structural concrete utilize indicated concrete plate at each building attachment. Utilize Hilti "Kwik -Bolt", or equal, for connecting concrete plate to structure. 5.2 Trapeze Hangers: Provide pipe clamps and resilient bushings for all trapeze -supported piping. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe size. 15D-2 Em 5.3 Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 5.4 Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 5.5 Support fire -water piping independently of other piping. 5.6 Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. 5.7 Provisions for Movement: Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops; expansion bends and similar units. 5.8 Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 5.9 Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. 5.10 Insulated Piping: Comply, with the following installation requirements. 5.10.1 Shields and Saddles: Where low -compressive -strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8" and over, install wood insulation saddles. Trimming Insulation Around Hangers: Do not trim insulation around any hanger. Install pipe initially in final position; utilize spacer below pipe during initial installation. insulation shall continue unchanged through hangers. END OF SECTION 15D 15D-3 SECTION 15E VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of valves specified in this section include the following: Ball Valves. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 Marking of Valves: Comply with MSS SP -25. 2.2 Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged or welding -end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10. 2.3 Valve Listing: For valves on fire protection piping, provide listing by UL and Associated Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies. 2.4 Valve Type: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications and installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each required valve. 3.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve. Include this data in Maintenance Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: d_ VAI VES: 4.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 5. BALL VALVES: 15E-1 5.1 General: Select with port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe area, include seat ring designed to hold sealing material. 5.2 For HVAC Hot Water Service: 5.2.1 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze 2 piece body, bronze ball, bronze stem. Nibco or approved equal. 6. VALVE FEATURES: 6.1 General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ANSI B31.1. 6.2 Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1. 6.3 Trim: Fabricate pressure -containing components of valve, including stems (shafts) and seats from brass or bronze materials, of standard alloy recognized in valve manufacturing industry: PART 3 - EXECUTION 7. INSTALLATION: 7.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements. 7.2 Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 7.3 Install valves with stems pointed up. 7.4 Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended -stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation. 7.5 Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves with the following ends, or types of pipe/tube connections: 7.5.1 Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Soldered -joint valves (for copper piping) and threaded -joint valves (for steel piping).. END OF SECTION 15E 15E-2 SECTION 15F VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of vibration isolation products specified in this section include the following: Neoprene Pads. Vibration Isolation Springs. Spring/ Pad Hangers Flexible Duct Connectors. Flexible Pipe Connectors. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 Manufacturer Certification: Where vibration isolation support units are indicated for minimum static deflection, provide manufacturer's certification that units have been tested and comply with indicated requirements. 3. SUBMITTALS: 4. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, detailed drawings, performance characteristics data and installation instructions for each type of unit required. 4.1.1 Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment. 4.1.2 For Spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid -compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. 4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases and other custom -fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 5. ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS: 5.1 Neoprene Pads: Oil -resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross -ribbed pattern, designed for neoprene -in - shear -type vibration isolation, and thicknesses required. 15F-1 5.2 Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound -steel compression springs, of high-strength, heat-treated, spring alloy steel; with outside diameter ..� not less than 0.8 times operating height; with lateral stiffness not less than vertical stiffness; and designed to reach solid height before exceeding rated fatigue point of steel. 5.3 Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 5 times rated loading of units. Fabricateunits to accept misalignment of suspension members, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal -to -metal contacts. 5.3.1 Provide vibration isolation spring with cap and pad -type isolator, securely retained in unit. 5.3.2 Provide neoprene pad, securely retained in unit. 5.3.3 Provide removable spacer in each unit, to limit deflection during installation to rated -load deflection. 5.3.4 Mason Model 30, or approved equal. 5.4 Flexible Duct Connectors: Laminated flexible sheet of cotton duck and sheet elastomer (butyl, neoprene or vinyl), reinforced with steel wire mesh where required for strength to with stand and accordian bellows to perform as flexible isolation unit, and of manufacturer's standard length for each size unless otherwise indicated. Equip each unit with galvanized steel retaining rings for airtight connection with ductwork. 5.5 Rubber Flexible Pipe Connectors: See Division 15 section on "Hydronic Specialities" for flexible hose kits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 6. PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS: 6.1 General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, including definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. 7. APPLICATIONS: -- 7.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, apply the following types of vibration isolators at indicated locations or for indicated items of equipment. 7.2 Isolation Hangers: Install for all suspended rotating equipment. 15F-2 7.3 Flexible Duct Connectors: Install at all connections with rotating equipment. 7.4 Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install in piping systems at all connections to motor -driven equipment.. 8. INSTALLATION: 8.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. 8.2 Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. 8.3 Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. 8.4 Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. 9. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install VAV-box so that no load is transferred to neoprene connectors. END OF SECTION 15F 15F-3 SECTION 15G PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: Piping System Insulation: Heating Water Piping Systems. Ductwork System Insulation: Dual Temperature Ductwork. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with lame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 3. SUBMITTALS. 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. 3.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS: 4.1 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Comply with FS HH -I-558, Form D, Type III, Class 12 for piping where highest temperature does not exceed 450 deg. F (232 deg C). Provide Certainteed "Snap-On ASJ-SSL" molded one- piece fiberglass insulation with K value of 0.23 at 75 deg F. Provide with all service jacket with self -seal lap. 4.2 Fiberglass Pipe Fitting Insulation: FS HH -I-558, Form E, Class 12. Provide Certainteed "Snap -Form" insulation and premolded fitting ^-- covers, or approved equal. Provide Class 16 for use with class 12 fiberglass pipe insulation, where temperature .does not exceed 450 deg F (232 deg C). 15G-1 4.3 Vapor Barrier Material: FS HH -B-100, Type I, paper -backed aluminum foil, except as otherwise indicated, strength and permeability rating equivalent to adjoining pipe insulation jacketing. 4.4 Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 4.5 Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 5. DUCT LINER INSULATION MATERIALS: 5.1 Comply with FS HH -I -545B. Provide Certainteed "Ultralite Type 300" or approved equal. Provide 1" thick insulation unless specified otherwise. Comply with requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. Comply with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA) AHC -101. 5.2 Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc. (ASC) ASC -A-7001. 5.3 Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA MF -1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 6. APPLICATIONS OF FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION: 6.1 Insulation Omitted: 6.1.1 Omit insulation on unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 6.2 Hot Piping: Insulate the following hot piping systems: Heating water supply and return. 6.2.1 Insulate each piping system specified above with: 1" thick fiberglas (for pipe sizes up to and including 6") or 1-1/2" thick fiberglass (for pipe sizes over 6"). 7. INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 7.1 General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure- that insulation serves its intended purpose. 7.2 Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. 7.3 Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. 15G-2 7.4 Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 7.5 Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulation. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to covered. 7.6 Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. 7.7 Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. 7.8 Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 7.9 Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. 7.10 Pipe Hanger Insulation Inserts: Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. 8. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIBERGLASS INSULATION: 8.1 Close self -seal lap in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 8.2 Seal ends of pipe insulation with vapor barrier at all valves, fittings, and at all butt joints. 8.3 Provide fittings with molded fiberglass covers and secure with 20 gauge corrosion resistant wire and apply a smoothing coat of insulating cement. Vapor seal with premolded fitting cover. Cover shall overlap the adjoining insulation and jackets shall be sealed at the edges with vapor barrier adhesive. The end of all covers shall be secured with pressure sensitive vinyl tape. Tape shall overlap jacket and cover one inch. -- 9. APPLICATIONS OF DUCTWORK INSULATION: 9.1 Dual Temperature Ductwork: Insulate all the following ducts systems: 15G-3 Supply air, 9.1.1 Insulate each ductwork system specified above with duct liner unless specified otherwise. 10. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 10.1 General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. 10.2 Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. 10.3 Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 10.4 Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. 10.5 Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 10.6 Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. 11. INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER INSULATION: 11.1 Install liner in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard (1975) based on the design air velocity ranges in regards to adhesives, mechanical fastenings and spacings. 11.2 Attach liner to sheet metal using adhesive covering 100% of the metal. 11.3 Provide mechanical fasteners spaced as follows: 11.3.1 Ends of duct: 3" from end of duct and lateral spacing of no more than 6" o.c. 11.3.2 Mid-section of duct: 16" spacing, both longitudinal (in direction of air flow)and transverse (across the duct). 11.4 Coat upstream edge of liner with adhesive. Provide metal nosing for air velocities above 4000 FPM. 12. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: 15G-4 12.1 Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. 12.2 Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 15G ,I - 15G -5 A SECTION 15H FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 2. Applications of fire protection systems include the following: Revisions to existing fire protection piping from existing pendant - head stubout to new head locations. New stubouts for additional heads. Revisions to main and sub -main piping (as necessary) to accommodate additional heads. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems:, and ANSI/NFPA 14 "Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems." 3.2 FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". 3.3 FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. 3.4 UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 3.5 Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for fire protection systems, materials and products. 4.2 Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and -connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 4.3 Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 and ANSI/NFPA 14, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 15H-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 5. FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: 5.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than 1 type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. 6. BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS: 6.1 General: Provide pipe, tube, and fittings complying with Division -15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: 6.2 Interior Piping: Provide schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6"; and 0.188" wall thickness for 8" and 10". Provide with mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll - groove or mechanical locking type. 6.3 At Contractor's option, provide schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded couplings and fittings. 7. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES: ..� 7.1 General: Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in: accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match equipment connections. 7.2 Automatic Sprinklers: Provide automatic sprinklers of type indicated on Drawings, and in accordance with the following listing. Provide fusible links for 165 deg F (74 deg C) unless otherwise r- indicated. Pendent. Conventional; 40% discharge upward, 60% downward. 7.3 Finish: Chrome Plate for occupied areas, cast brass for unoccupied areas. 7.4 Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with capacity to store 10 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers. PART 3 - EXECUTION �- 8. INSTALLATION OF PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS: 15H-2 8.1 General: Install pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with Division -15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings". 8.2 Fire Sprinkler Piping Systems: 8.2.1 General: Comply with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 13 for installation of fire sprinkler piping materials. Install fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire sprinkler piping complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. 10.2.2Coordinate with other work, including plumbing piping, as necessary to interface components of fire sprinkler piing properly with other work. 9. INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES: 9.1 General: Install fire protection specialties as indicated, and in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 and 14. 9.2 Scope: Adapt the existing wet -pipe sprinkler system to cover the revised basement area. This will require adjusting some pendant heads (which now serve finished areas), replacing certain existing upright heads with pendant heads and extending down below new ceiling, installing new pendant and/or upright heads (to cover areas where there is not an existing upright, head), and replacing branch and/or main piping so that branch/main is properly sized for the final number of heads. 9.2.1 This project will require a thorough inspection of the existing system to determine how many heads are fed from a particular main.branch pipe, etc. At the end of this project the Contractor will be required to submit a certificate stating that the system as installed (at the end of the project) DOES comply with NFPA13. INSPECT THE SITE BEFORE BIDDING. Any and ALL modifications to system to assure that this does occur will be accomplished by the Contractor, 9.3 Attachments at Existing Up -Right Heads: Remove existing heads 10. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 10.1 Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue 15H-3 A— flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. 11. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 11.1 Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested. 12. EXTRA STOCK: 12.1 General: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinkler heads, amounting to 1 unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each. END OF SECTION 15H 15H-4 SECTION 15I HEATING R IPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1. GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS: 1.1 See Section 15C for general piping requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. HEATING PIPING MATERIALS: 2.1 Pipe size 2" and Smaller: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded class 125 cast-iron fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION OF HEATING WATER PIPING: 3.1 Install piping in accordance with Division -15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube and Fittings". 3.2 Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes and reducer flush. 3.3 Install piping level with no pitch. 3.4 Connect new branch -feed piping to existing stub -out on existing mains. 3.5 Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. 4. INSTALLATION OF VALVES: 4.1 Install valves in accordance with Division -15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Valves". 4.2 Branch Takeoff Valves: Reuse (if in good condition) or replace (if will not hold) existing valves at existing branch stub -outs. This replace (if required) will be included as a part of this contract and no change issued to cover these costs. 4.3 Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item (even when they are the only item on a branch. 5. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: 15I-1 5.1 General: Connect heating water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, anc comply with equipment manufacturer's - instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return. Install manual air vent valve element in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where indicated, install .� automatic temperature control valve with unions between ball valve and equipment item. 6. CLEANING, FLUSHING, AND INSPECTING: 6.1 General: Clean and flush system, with clear water, of all dirt, metal chips, sand, and foreign matter. After flushing remove, clean, ..� and replace all strainer baskets or screens. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports, accessory items, and obvious leaks. END OF SECTION 15I 15I-2 SECTION 15J HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of hydronic specialties specified in this section include the following: Self -Balancing Hose Kits Vent Valves 2. SUBMITTALS: 2.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured hydronic specialty. 2.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured hydronic specialty. Include this data in Maintenance Manual. 2.3 Hydronic Specialty Types: type by same manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Provide hydronic specialties of same 3. MANUFACTURED HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES: 3.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated hydronic specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 3.2 Self -Balancing Hose Kits: Provide self balancing hose kit assembly as manufactured by PSI, or approved equal. Each assembly shall include ball valve with auto flow control, temperature -pressure test port, union with flexible return hose, ball valve with strainer and temperature -pressure test port, blow -down valve, union with flexible supply hose and a condensate hose with p trap and blow down hose connection. Each hose kit is to be pre --packaged and tagged for each individual unit. 3.3 Vent Valves: 3.3.1 Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually with screwdriver or thumbscrew, 1/8" N.P.T. connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 15J-1 4. INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES: 4.1 Self -Balancing Hose Kits: Install at each VAV unit. ., 5. Vent Valves: 5.1.1 Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated. END OF SECTION 15J 15J-2 SECTION 15K TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of terminal units required for project include the following: Fan -powered VAV units. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 UL Compliance: Provide electrical components for terminal units which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for terminal units showing dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions. 3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field connection details. 3.3 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. FAN -POWERED VAV UNITS: 4.1 General: Provide constant volume fan powered terminal. units as shown. Provide Magna Flow or approved equal. The entire terminal unit, including heating coil shall be designed and built as a single unit. The units shall be provided with a primary variable air volume damper that controls the air quantity in response to the pneumatic thermostat. The units shall contain a fan and motor assembly and a hot water coil. The coil shall be located in the discharge of the blower section. 4.2 Casing: Unit casing shall be 20 ga minimum, galvanized steel, fully lined with 1" thick insulation. Coat cut edges of exposed insulation with approved sealant. Provide with cam -latch type bottom access doors, which shall provide access to controls and fan motor. 15K-1 0 4.3 Primary Air Flow Control Device: Provide with pneumatic flow control device. Thermostat shall close damper (from factory -set maximum position setting). Provide opposed blade damper in box housing (damper leakage shall not exceeds 2% at 1" w.c.). 4.4 Flow Sensor: Provide sensor integral to terminal unit which shall be able to measure to within 5% of preset maximum volume (static pressure between 1/2" and 6" w.c.). 4.5 Chassis: Construct chassis of galvanized steel with flanged edges. 4.6 Coils: Construct of 5/8" seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins. Design for 30 psi working Pressure, and leak test at 300 psi under water. 4.7 Fans: Provide centrifugal forward curved galvanized wheels, dynamically balanced. 4.8 Motors: Provide direct -drive 277V motors with integral thermal overload protection. Run test motors at factory in assembled unit ^- prior to shipping. Provide quickly detachable motor cords. 4.9 Controls: Provide pneumatic control package consisting of manually -operated speed switch (factory -supplied), VAV damper and a modulating three-way valve (supplied from Control SubContractor). 4.10 Connections: Provide single -point electrical and pneumatic connections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 5. INSTALLATION OF FAN -POWERED VAV UNITS: 5.1 General: Install fan -coil units as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 5.2 Locate VAV-boxes as indicated, coordinate with other -trades to assure correct recess size for recessed units. 5.3 Support units on all -thread rod with neoprene vibration isolators. Install new building attachments for threaded rods. Install units as high as possible. 5.4 Install piping as indicated, using manufactured volume -control hose assembly. Bleed air from each unit and test operation. 5.5 Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. 15K-2 6. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING OF TERMINAL UNITS: 6.1 General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets. 6.2 Install new filter units for terminals requiring same. END OF SECTION 15K 15K-3 SECTION 15L 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of low pressure ductwork required for project include the following: Cooling/Heating supply and return air system. �-- 1.2 Ductwork components specified herein include the following: Ductwork Materials. Duct Accessories. Outlets and Inlets. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard" for fabrication and installation of low pressure ductwork. 2.2 NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/ NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air -Conditioning Systems". 2.3 UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (OL) Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". - 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and factory -fabricated ductwork and duct accessories. 3.2 Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct accessories, and outlets and inlets. 3.3 Product Data: Submit product data on fire dampers. 3.4 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on outlets and inlets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. DUCTWORK MATERIALS: 15L-1 4.1 Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. 4.2 Flexible Duct: Provide factory -made insulated flexible round air duct with reinforced metalized Mylar outer jacket enclosing a 1 1/2" thick fiber glass insulation wrapped around a continuous inner air barrier of double layer polyester, reinforced with an encapsulated steel wire helix. Provide duct with integral hanger support, encapsulated in the middle of the jacket tab. 4.2.1 All flexible duct shall be classified as a type 1 duct. 4.2.2 Provide Certainteed Certaflex 7 or Certaflex 25 with punchline tab, or approved equal. NO EXCEPTIONS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL. 5. MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: 5.1 Duct Sealant: Non -hardening, non -migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. 5.2 Duct Tape: Use Arno C-520, or approved equal, 2" wide duct tape for making duct-to-duct or end connections for round flexible duct. 5.3 Duct Clamps: Use Panduit PLT -H, or approved equal, banding strap for flexible duct connections. 5.4 Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot -dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 5.5 Round Duct Tap: Where specified, provide a round duct tap complete with scoop and manual butterfly balancing damper. 6. METAL DUCTWORK FABRICATION: 6.1 DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWING ARE section "Mechanical Insulation" for liner (if any). NET OPEN AREA. See Division 15 information on thickness of duct 6.2 Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12 -foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. 6.3 Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - 5th Edition". 6.4 Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Limit angular tapers 15L-2 to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers. Make square elbows having 4 gores(90 degree) or 2 gores(45 degrees) as appropriate. 7. DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS: 8. Provide the following type duct system for each specific duct system: Cooling/Heating Supply/Return (downstream of VAV box) : Lined galvanized steel duct. Cooling/Heating Supply/Return (between primary air trunk duct and VAV box): Flexible duct. Grille taps(only where noted): Flexible duct. 9. DUCT ACCESSORIES: 9.1 Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards". 9.2 Wall -Type Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Construct casings of 11 ga. galvanized steel with 160-165 deg. F (71-74 deg. C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features: Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type. Blade Material: Steel, match casing. Damper out of air -stream (when not activated). 9.3 Access Doors: Provide "sandwich" style insulated access door, DuctMAte or approved equal. Provide with hand knob, neoprene gasket, factory -supplied cutout template. Provide 18"x12" at all locations except where duct is smaller than 12" net open dimension, in which case provide 12"x8% 9.4 Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/,V' o.c., supported with bars -- perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork. 9.5 Extractor: Provide extractor consisting of bank of curved blades r- on two inch centers. Assemble so that each blade is synchronized with the other and the entire unit pivots on base plate. Unit shall pivot from full open to full closed with blades overlapping for full shutoff. Components shall be manufactured from the following gages: blades-20ga, base -18 ga, straps-16ga. Provide with linkage with 3/8" square hole for external operations. Provide Air -Trac model EX -2 or approved equal. 15L-3 9.6 Splitter Damper: Fabricate splitter damper from same material as duct, of the following gages: 18" max dimen = 22 gal 19" max di men = 16 gal 9.6.1 Fabricate damper so that length is 3/4 the width of the smaller duct being split. Provide Young No. 656 3/8" end bearings, No. 660 square CDS 3/8" rod, and Young U -bolts or approved equal. 9.7 Duct Hardware: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by 1 manufacturer for all items on project. Provide the following: 9.7.1 Extractor Regulator, accessible ceilings: provide with push-pull rod, rod extending through duct wall. Provide with locking set -screw on rod. 9.7.2 Extractor Regulator, inaccessible ceilings: provide Young No. 1, or approved equal, surface -mounted regulator. Provide with Young No. 660 square CDS 3/8" rod, and Young No. 656 3/8" end bearing. 9.7.3 Splitter Regulator: Provide Young No. S-900 3/8" steel rod air - split regulator, or approved equal. Provide with cadmium plated steel rod, 3 1/2 turns to the inch. Substitute Young No. 1 regulator for the standard regulator. 10. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES: 10.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard ceiling/wall/floor/duct air distribution devices where shown; of size, shape capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. 10.2 SubStrata Compatibility: Provide diffusers/grilles/registers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling/wall/floor systems. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling/wall/floor systems which will contain each type of air distribution devices. 10.3 Types: Provide devices of type_, capacity and with accessories and finishes as listed on Air Distribution Schedule. The following requirements shall apply unless noted otherwise. 11. Diffuser Faces: Provide perforated face with square housing, core of square concentric louvers, square or round duct connection (provide round duct connection only where round duct called for on the drawings). 11.1.1 Return Air Grilles: Provide perforated panel with square frame. 11.1.2 Diffuser Mountings: Provide diffusers with flush perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling or provide diffuser housing 15L-4 sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar. 11.1.3 Diffuser Patterns: Provide perforated face with 4 direction air flow unless specified otherwise. 11.1 Supply/Exhaust Dampers: Provide adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face of diffuser/grille on all supply and exhaust diffuser or grilles unless specified otherwise. 11.2 Diffuser Accessories: Provide curved blade extractor mounted on adjustable frame to product air scooping action in duct at diffuser take -off. Provide tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustment. .,� 11.3 Diffuser Finishes: Provide semi -gloss white enamel prime finish unless specified otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 12. INSTALLATION OF ABOVE -GRADE DUCTWORK: 12.1 General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connection, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. 12.2 Seal ductwork, after installation, to seal class recommended, and method prescribed in SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - 5th Edition". 12.3 Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop -fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. 12.4 Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. 12.5 Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment ,.. of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. 12.6 Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork form view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. 15L-5 13. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. 13.1 Where ducts pass through interior partitions, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct -plus -insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2I. 13.2 Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. 14. INSTALLATION OF ABOVE -GRADE DUCT SUPPORTS: 14.1 Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - 5th Edition" hangers and supports section. 14.2 Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and to prevent buckling. 14.3 Locate hangers of ducts penetrating wall (or partitions) as though the walls will contribute no support to the duct. 14.4 Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct. 14.5 Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than or equal to the specified maximums. 14.6 Install hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size' horizontal vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install additional hangers at maximum allowed intervals measured along the heel lines of the elbows. 14.7 Provide at least one set of hangers for short branches 3 ft or less in length. 14.8 Locate duct hangers approximately: 2 to 24 inches from flexible connectors 12 to 36 inches from main duct to first hanger of long branch ducts. 2 to 12 inches from ends of all branch ducts. 2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints. 6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are the same as specified hanger intervals. 6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by ducts. 14.9 Space hangers approximately: 15L-6 14.9.1 Ducts with areas up to 4 sq ft may have their hangers spaced up to 8 ft apart. 15. INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCT: 15.1 Supporting Duct: Hang the duct using integral punchline tab and 12 gauge wire. Using standard hole punch, punch holes in tab approximately 30" on center(60" max spacing). Prior to punching tab, install a strip of duct tape along the tab for reinforcement. Punch hole below cord built into tab. Support so that maximum sag of 5" per 10' will occur. 15.2 Bending Duct: Do not make bends in duct greater than 45 degrees. (For direction changes in excess of 45 degrees use round sheet metal elbow, insulate elbow with 1" duct wrap). Minimum bending radius 1/2 the duct diameter. 15.3 Do not compress duct during installation, using only that length necessary for the installation. 15.4 Tap -In Connection: Roll back outer jacket and insulation and approximately 3", exposing inner air barrier core. Slide core over tap -in collar a minimum of 2". Tape core to collar with two wraps of 2" wide duct tape, rubbing each wrap with sufficient pressure to activate pressure sensitive adhesive. Pull insulation and outer jacket over the inner core seal and tape outer jacket to collar with two wraps of 2" wide duct tape, wrapping in a helical fashion. Install metal clamping band or PAnduit PLT -H strap over taped joint. Install band far enough back to clamp both outer jacket and inner core. Tighten band snugly using Panduit tension/cutoff tool #GS4H-120; hand - tightening is not acceptable. 16. INSTALLATION OF DUCT HARDWARE: 16.1 Extractor: Install regulator so that is accessible from ceiling space. Install regulator opposite specified end bearing(if duct in '-" excess of 8" in width, measured parallel with the regulator rod. Position regulator so that full range of extractor is available. Install components air tight. 16.2 Splitter: Install splitter regulator so that full damper adjustment is possible. 17. INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS AND INLETS: 17.1 General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that..products serve intended functions. 15L-7 17.2 Coordination with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of outlets and inlets with other work. 17.3 Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules. 18. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: 18.1 Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deteri orati on . 18.2 Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. END OF SECTION 15L 15L-8 SECTION 15M PNEUMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: �-- 1.1 Scope: Provide control for new components and connect into existing control network. Connect to existing compressed air main tubing. Inspect site to determine that existing main tubing adequate a, to serve new components. 1.2 Extent of pneumatic temperature control systems work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.3 Control sequences are specified in this section. 2. Refer to Division -16 sections for power wiring to line voltage devices; not work of this section. 3. Refer to Division -16 sections for control wiring necessary for pneumatic temperature control systems; not work of this section. 4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 5. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 6. SUBMITTALS: 6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for each control device and compressed air station furnished, including installation instructions and start-up instructions. Submit wiring diagram for each electrical control device. 6.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of control device, and compressed air stations. Include this data in maintenance manual. 7. DELIVERY, STROAGE, AND HANDLING: 7.1 Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain cartons and end caps through — shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment and pipe -end damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment and 15M-1 inside of pipe and tube. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 8. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: 8.1 General: Provide pneumatic temperature control products in sizes and of capacities indicated, conforming to manufacturers standard materials and components as published in their product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for application indicated. 8.2 Air Piping: Seamless copper tubing, Type K or L, ANSI/ASTM B 88; with cast -bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.18; or wrought -copper solder -joint fittings, ANSI B16.22; except brass compression -type fittings at connections to equipment. 8.3 Air Piping: Virgin polyethylene non-metallic tubing, ASTM D 2737, and with flame-retardent harness for multiple tubing. Use compression or push -on polyethylene fittings. 8.4 Control Valves: Provide factory fabricated pneumatic control valves of type, body material and pressure class indicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressure and temperature in piping system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide valve size same as connecting pipe size. Equip control valves with heavy-duty pneumatic actuators, with proper shutoff rating for each individual application. 9. Water Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics with rangeability of 50 to 1. 10. Single Seated Valves: Cage type trim, providing seating and guiding surfaces for plug on "top and bottom" guided plugs. 10.1.1 Valve Trim and Stems: All sizes, polished stainless steel. 10.1.2 Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon, self-adjusting. 10.1.3 Valve Pressure Drop: As noted on drawings or in schedule. 10.1 Dampers: Automatic control dampers included integral with fan - powered VAV box. 10.1.1 Pneumatic Operators: Size pneumatic actuators to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2 -position action as specified. 15M-2 10.2 Room Thermostats: Provide thermostats which match existing. Provide room thermostats of 2 -pipe, non -bleed or "relay" type design, -, fully proportional with adjustable throttling range and tamper -proof locking settings. Provide single or dual temperature, direct acting or reverse acting thermostats as specified for sequence of operations. 10.2.1 Thermostat Construction: Manufacturer's standard covers and thermostats (whether visible or not). 10.2.2 For checkout purposes, provide either quick -connect test plug for checking branch pressure (accessible by removal of thermostat cover), or permanently mounted pressure gages at each control device -- supplied by thermostat branch signal. 10.2.3 Install limits on heating/cooling dual -temperature thermostats, to prevent control point on cooling cycle from going below 75 deg F (24 C), and from going above 75 deg F (24 C) on heating cycle, regardless of set -point scale. 10.3 Indicating Controllers: Provide temperature, humidity, static pressure, dewpoint, etc., controllers of high capacity receiver controller type, fully adjustable, direct or reverse acting, 2 -pipe �- non -bleed design, capable of accepting 1 or 2 transmitter inputs with separate third input port for local or remote control point readjustment, and adjustable proportional band. Provide direct reading replacement scales to match range on input devices or separate adjustment switches with calibrated dials. 10.3.1 Provide, at each sensing input on controller, 1-1/2" diameter dial indicator with scales to match input range (in deg. F, relative humidity, inches of water) for convenience in calibration and adjustment. 11. Equip control output air line (branch pressure) with either quick - connect test plug or with permanently installed 1-1/2" diameter Pressure gage. 11.1 Replacement Materials: Equip pneumatic damper motors, valve motors, controllers, thermostats 'and positioning relays with Y-- replaceable diaphragms and relay mechanisms. 11.2 Electrical Requirements: Provide electric -pneumatic or pneumatic -electric switches, electrical devices and relays that are UL -listed and of type meeting current and voltage characteristics of project . PART 3 - EXECUTION 12. INSTALLATION: 15M-3 12.1 General: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing -in drawings and details on drawings. 12.2 Control Air Piping: Accessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in mechanical equipment rooms; inside mechanical equipment enclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels, etc.; in pipe chases, or suspended ceilings with easy access. Inaccessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in concrete slabs; furred walls; or ceilings with no access. 12.2.1 Provide copper tubing with maximum unsupported length of 3'-0", for accessible tubing run exposed to view. Polyethylene tubing may be used in lieu of above, when run within adequately supported, rigid enclosure, such as metallic raceways, EMT, or PVC pipe. Terminal single -line connections less than 18" in length may be copper tubing, or polyethylene tubing run inside flexible steel protection. Accessible tubing run in concealed locations, such as pipe chases, suspended ceilings with easy access, etc., may be copper or polyethylene bundled and sheathed tubing. 12.2.2 Provide copper or polyethylene tubing for inaccessible tubing. If polyethylene tubing is used, install in EMT or vinyl -jacketed polyethylene tubing. 12.2.3 Pressure Test control air piping at 30 psi for 24 hours. Test fails if more than 5 psi loss occurs. 12.2.4 Fasten flexible connections bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support tubing neatly. 12.2.5 Unit Mounted Equipment: Ship electric -pneumatic relays, pneumatic -electric, switches, valves, dampers, damper motors to system manufacturer for mounting and wiring at factory. 12.3 Control Wiring: Install control wiring, without splices between terminal points, color -coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, "National Electric Code". 12.3.1 Install circuits over 25 -volt with color -coded No. 12 wire in electric metallic tubing. 12.3.2 Install circuits under 25 -volt with color -coded No. 18 wire with 0.031" high temperature (105 deg F (41 C)) plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath over all. 12.4 Installation of Mechanical sections for installation of valve not work of this section. 15M-4 Devices: Refer to Division -15 bodies, control wells, and dampers; ZZ 12.5 Final Adjustment of Equipment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment provided as work of this section. 12.5.1 Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system. 13. CONTROL SEQUENCES: 13.1 Each fan -powered VAV box constitutes a completely separate zone �- from all the other zones in the building. Each zone controls cooling by modulating the primary air damper. Each zone controls heating by modulating the heating water control valve. 13.2 Thermostat Senses Temperature Rising Above Setpoint: Any time the thermostat senses a temperature above the setpoint, it will modulate the heating water valve closed. As the temperature continues to rise (after the valve is fully closed and RA fan is off) the primary air damper will modulate open (thereby permitting cooling air to enter the space). 13.3 Thermostat Senses Temperature Falling Below Setpoint: Any time the thermostat senses a temperature falling below the set point, it will modulate the cooling primary air damper closed. Once the damper is fully closed (or closed to its pre-set minimum air position) the RA fan will activate. As the temperature continues to fall the heating water control valve will be modulated open, allowing heating water to enter the heating coil. END OF SECTION 15M 15M-5 SECTION 16A ECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following: Engraved Plastic Signs. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical marking and labeling identification systems. 2.2 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each identification material and device required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 4.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. 4.2 Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L --P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. 4.2.1 Thickness: 1/8", except as otherwise indicated. 4.2.2 Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. 16A-1 4.2.3 Provide Seton Style EB or equivalent engraved plastic signs with normal Gothic style lettering. 4.2.4 Lettering: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled on Electrical Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 5. APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: 5.1 Install identification after completion of painting. 5.2 Install engraved plastic -laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building. 5.3 Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. 5.4 Provide signs for each unit of the following: 5.4.1 Panelboards. 5.5 Install signs at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate. END OF SECTION 16A 16A-2 SECTION 16B SIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Items discussed includes, but is not limited to, the following: Raceways. Conductors. Boxes and Fittings. Taps and Splices. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways and with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet -steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. 2.2 UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems, wire, cable, connectors, boxes and fittings and provide all items UL -listed and labeled. 2.3 NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems, electrical wire, cable, connectors, boxes and fittings. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each device or component required. This includes raceways, conductors, connectors, boxes, etc. 3.2 Connectors: Submit manufacturer's code scheme for matching compression connector and die. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING: 4.1 General: Provide metal conduit as indicated. 4.1.1 Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): FS WW -C-563 and ANSI C80.3. 4.1.2 EMT Fittings: FS W -F-408. Provide only compression -type fittings; "set -screw" fittings will not be accepted. 16B-1 4.1.3 Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW -C-566, Type .2: Zinc -coated steel. 4.1.4 Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W -F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. 4.1.5 Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid -tight flexible metal conduit; construct of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double -wrapped steel; galvanize inside and outside; coat with liquid -tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 4.1.6 Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W -F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. 5. WIRE AND CABLE: 5.1 General: Provide wire, cable and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for the installation. 5.2 Provide factory -fabricated wire of sizes, ratings, materials and types indicated for each service. 5.2.1 UL Type: THHN. 5.2.2 UL Type: THW. 5.2.3 Material: Copper. 5.2.4 Conductors: Solid (AWG 20 to AWG 8 only). 5.2.5 Conductors: Concentric -lay -stranded (standard flexibility). 5.2.6 Outer Covering: Thermoplastic. 6. CONNECTORS: 6.1 Provide UL -listed and labeled components and devices. 6.2 Crimp -Type Compression Connectors (all copper conductors No. 8 AWG and larger): Provide high conductivity copper crimp -type; 11sco "CT" °^ series for straight splices or "AH" series for tap splices, or approved equal. Comply with UL486. Provide color -coded between connector and die. 6.3 Twist -On Connectors (all copper conductors no. 18 thru no. 10 AWG): Provide twist -on wire joints at outlet box taps, Thomas & Betts series "PT" or approved equal. 6.4 Heat Shrinkable Tubing: Provide heavy-duty protective covering, rated for 600 volts, 90 deg C, designed for 3:1 shrink ratio. Provide -- Steel City type "HS" or approved equal. 16B-2 7. FABRICATED BOXES: 7.1 Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion -resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. 7.1.1 Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option. 7.2 Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. 7.3 Conduit Outlet Bodies and Cast Device Boxes: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded - conduit -entrance ends, removable covers, cover gaskets, and corrosion - resistant screws. Provide Appleton or approved equal. 7.4 Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion - resistant punched -steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connector, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 8. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS: 8.1 Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions; applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and complying with recognized industry practices. 8.2 All conduit shall be run in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. When requested by the Owner or Engineer, a complete conduit system layout shall be submitted for approval for each floor or section under construction before permanent support or location is made. 8.3 All conduit shall be installed as a complete system without wires and shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from fitting to fitting. A run of conduit from between outlet and outlet or between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of four 16B-3 90 deg bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. 8.4 No feeder conduit shall be longer than 80 feet between junction boxes or cabinets unless there are no direction changes and only a straight in-line pull of wire is required. In such straight -in-line runs the distance between cabinets or boxes may be increased to 100 feet. 8.5 Coat underfloor metal raceways with bitumastic type protective coating prior to placing concrete. 8.6 Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. 8.7 Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide only above suspended ceilings and only for lighting fixture "whips". All other applications use liquid - tight flexible metal conduit. 8.8 Liquid -tight flexible conduit: Provide for motor connections, and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. 8.9 Below -Grade Conduit: No less than 3'-0" prior to penetrating floor slab, change underfloor conduit to EMT or rigid steel conduit. Provide concrete -tight fittings and coat conduit as specified in this section. 8.10 Conduit Used as "Ground" Path: This electrical installation shall consist of a complete "green -wire" -ground system, i.e. each electrical "- device shall be grounded with a separate ground wire and shall not rely on the conduit system for ground path. This in no way release the Contractor from complying with NEC requirements to install all conduits completely grounded. 8.11 Minimum Conduit Size: The minimum conduit size acceptable on this project is 3/4" unless specifically approved by the Engineer. 9. SPECIAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS: -- 9.1 Telephone Conduit: 9.1.1 General: Provide all telephone conduit with pull wire. 9.1.2 Telephone Outlet Conduit: Provide 3/4" EMT conduit for indicated conduit runs. Extend from telephone outlet location(consisting of standard receptacle j -box located 12" A.F.F.) to ceiling area. 9.1.3 NOTE: ALL EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLING IS TO BE LEFT INTACT. At locations where existing telephone outlets are removed, remove the cable from the existing outlet, coil the cable neatly and hang it from the structure above (except where other arrangements are approved by 16B-4 the Owner/Architect). The Owner will arrange to have modifications made to telephone cabling outside this contract. 9.2 HVAC Control Conduit: 9.2.1 General: All HVAC control conduit shall be run in EMT conduit, unless specifically stated otherwise. No exposed wiring shall be allowed. NOTE: All control devices may not be shown on both the "mechancial" and "electrical" drawings. See Section 15000, paragraph titled "Mechanical -Electrical Coordination". Review all drawings and/or specification sections for information on control requirements PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID. 9.3 Electrical Service Conduits: 9.3.1 Provide EMT steel conduits between panels. 10. INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE: 10.1 General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 10.2 Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface. 10.3 Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway. 10.4 Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. 10.5 Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot damage raceway. 10.6 Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. 10.7 Keep conductor splices to minimum. 10.8 Install splices and tapes which have mechanical strength and insulation rating equivalent -or -better than conductor. 10.9 Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. 16B-5 10.10 Color Coding: Provide conductors with colored insulation complying with the following schedule: 10.10.1 120/208V System: Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue. Neutral: White or Gray. Ground: Green. Switch Leg:Black w/ White, Red w/ White., Blue w/ White. 10.10.2 277/480V System: Phase A: Purple. Phase B: Brown. Phase C: Yellow. Neutral: White or Gray. Ground: Green. Switch Leg: Purple w/ White, Brown. w/ White, Yellow w/ White. 10.10.3 ALL SERVICE, FEEDER AND BRANCH CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SO CODED. 10.10.4 All wiring No. 8 and larger shall be black and shall be marked with color banding tape as specified. All phase conductors, neutral and equipment ground conductors shall each be marked with colored tape. This tape marking shall be applied at the breakers, mains, and in all wireway, pullbox, auxillary gutter, junction box, motor terminal box and transformer enclosure. In wireways and auxillary gutters longer than two feet, install tape marking every four feet of wiring in the raceway. 10.11 Wiring Sizing: No conductor smaller than #12 shall be used. In the case of #12 "home runs" over 75 feet in length resize in accordance with the following: A. 75 to 125 feet:410 AWG. B. 125 feet+: #8 AWG. 10.11.1 The sizing of all wire except remote control wire shall be accomplished in the case of both feeder and branch circuits by conforming to the following provisions:. A. 277/ 48OV: 1.0% at max load with 90% power factor. B. 120/208V: 2.0% at max load with 90% power factor. 11. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 11.1 Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris. 12. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 12.1 Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. 12.2 Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. 13. APPLICATION: 13.1 Conduit: 13.1.1 EMT: Provide for all building feeder and branch circuits. 13.2 Conductors: 13.2.1 THW: Provide for all feeder circuits and otherwise as required by NEC due to site conditions. 13.2.2 THHN: Provide for all branch circuitry, except where restricted by NEC. END OF SECTION 16B 16B-7 SECTION 16C PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ^-� 1.1 Types of electrical following: Receptacles. Switches. Wall plates. wiring devices in this section include the 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. 2.2 UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL -listed and labeled. 2.3 NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general- and specific -purpose wiring devices. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES: 4.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and complying with NEMA Stds Pub No. WD 1. Where types indicated, provide proper selection as deter ied aby nd gInstaller radin are not fulfill wiring requirements, and complying with NEC and NEMA standards for wiring devices. -" 4.2 Receptacles: 4.2.1 Specification -Grade Duplex or Simplex: Provide duplex or simplex specification -grade type receptacles, 2 -pole, 3 -wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20 -amperes, 125 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Provide all nylon face and bodies, flat face with 16C-1 body color -coded for rating. Provide Leviton "Spec Master" model 5362 (duplex) and model 5361 (simplex) with limited ten-year warranty or approved equal. 4.2.2 Hospital -Grade Isolated Ground Duplex or Simplex: Provide duplex or simplex hospital -grade type receptacles, 2 -pole, 3 -wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20 -amperes, 125 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Provide UL -Listed as "Hospital Grade" and as "Isolated Ground". Provide all nylon face and bodies, flat orange - colored face with body color -coded for rating, with mounting straps fully insulated from grounding path created through metal boxes. Provide Leviton "Spec Master" model 5362 -IG (duplex) and model 5361 -IG (simplex) with limited ten-year warranty or approved equal. 4.3 Switches: 4.3.1 Snap: Provide specification -grade flush single and double -pole two, three and four way, toggle or key switches, 20- or 30 -ampere, 125/277 -volt AC, quiet operation, green grounding screw, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle, and back or side -wired screw terminals. Provide with urea molded parts, color coded for rating. Provide Leviton "Spec Master" with ten limited warranty, model 1221 or approved equal. 5. WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: 5.1 Lighting and Power Wall Plates: Provide single -switch, duplex, or simplex outlet wall plates for wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plates possessing the following additional construction feature: 5.1.1 Material and Finish: 0.04" thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel. 5.2 Telephone Wall Plates: Provide similar to above except with single bushing outlet. Similar to Hubbell #SM2SS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 6. INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: 6.1 Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. 16C-2 6.2 Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation.of wiring devices with other work. 6.3 Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean ., and free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. 6.4 Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work is completed. 6.5 Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is completed. 7. PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES: 7.1 Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. 8. GROUNDING: 8.1 Provide electrically -continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. 9. TESTING: 9.1 Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity- connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16C 16C-3 SECTION 16D POWER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of power distribution components specified in this section include the following: Panelboards. Overcurrent Protective Devices. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 Special Use -Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special use, with UL marks indicating that special type usage. 2.2 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to panelboards and accessories, and enclosures; provide units which have been UL -listed and labeled. 2.3 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes. 2.4 NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Std. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt maximum)", Pub. No. 19 "Panelboards", and installation portion of Pub. No. PB 1.1,' "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less". 2.5 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489, "Molded -Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL -listed and labeled. 2.6 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std Pub Nos. AB 1, AB 2 and SG 3 pertaining to molded -case and low -voltage power type circuit breakers. 2.7 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and ground -fault protection systems. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including - specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. 16D-1 3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground -fault circuit interrupters, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS n 4. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS: 4.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings - indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete �. installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply With NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. 4.2 Interiors: 4.2.1 All interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machining, -, drilling or tapping. 4.2.2 Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings. 4.2.3 Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall �. be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A ground bus will be included in all panels. 4.3 Boxes: 4.3.1 Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with National Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. A. No "load centers" will be accepted. 4.4 Trim: 16D-2 4.4.1 Switching device handles shall be accessible. Doors and panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have flush type cylinder lock and catch except doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners top and bottom of door in addition to the flush type cylinder lock and catch. Panelboard switching devices with individual dead front doors shall be acceptable in lieu of standard door in trim design. 4.5 Panelboard trim clamps shall be of the indicating type. 4.5.1 Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be keyed alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished with each door. 4.5.2 The panelboard front shall provide door -and -door construction consisting of hinged inner dead -front shield and a formed door over the entire panelboard. The front shall be tamper resistant and shall not be removable with the door locked. 4.5.3 All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall be properly cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating, and finished with a gray ANSI 61 paint. After installation, trim clamps shall not be accessible when the panel door is closed and locked. 4.6 Conductors: 4.6.1 All main bus bars shall be copper or aluminum, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 deg. C above an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C maximum.] 4.7 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: 4.7.1 Panels where shown for use at 240 volts maximum shall be UL listed with integrated assembly rating of 22K A.I.C. and shall be Square D, type NQOD or approved equal. 5. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES: 5.1 Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: 5.1.1 General: Except as' otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. 16D-3 5.1.2 Provide factory -assembled, molded -case circuit breakers ampere ratings as specified, 250 -volts, 60 HZ. Provide breakers with — permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole. Construct with overcenter, trip -free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and in an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.; 6. GROUNDING SYSTEMS: 6.1 General: Provide each electrical grounding system indicated, with assembly of materials including, but not necessarily limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless legs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate needed for complete installation. 6.2 Provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 7. INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS: 7.1 General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 7.2 Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. 7.3 Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. 7.4 Provide electrical connections within enclosures. 7.5 Fill out panelboards' circuit directory cards upon completion of installation work. Only type -written circuit directories will be accepted. 7.6 Connect circuitry within panelboard in the same order as shown on the panel schedule. 7.7 Replace specified circuit breakers in existing panelboard and replace with indicated breakers and then sub -feed the new panel from the existing. 16 D-4 7.7.1 CONTRACTOR MUST CHECK EACH CIRCUIT CALLED TO BE REMOVE AND CONFIRM THAT ALL EXISTING RECEPTACLES, ETC. FED FROM THAT CIRCUIT ARE NOT TO BE REUSED. 7.7.2 ALL ITEMS CURRENTLY CONNECTED TO THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND NOT SHOWN TO BE REMOVED AND/OR ABANDONED SHALL BE CONNECTED AT THE END OF THIS PROJECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID SUFFICIENT COST TO MAKE WHATEVER INSPECTIONS ARE NECESSARY TO ENSURE THAT THIS IS ACCOMPLISHED. 7.7.3 When installing new circuit breakers in an existing panelboard, those new breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the original panelboard and of the same style breaker as the bother breakers populating the panel. 8. INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES: 8.1 Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. 8.2 Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. 8.3 Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling. 9. GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION: 9.1 Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. Comply with requirements of NEC, NECA and NEMA standards for installation of grounding. END OF SECTION 16D 16D-5 SECTION 16E PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of motor and circuit disconnect devices specified in this section include the following: �- Motor Starters. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide devices which have been UL - listed and labeled. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each device required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. MOTOR STARTERS: r— 4.1 General: Provide motor starters and ancillary components; which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for �. complete installation. 4.2 AC Manual Starters: Provide single-, two-, or three-pole(as appropriate) manual motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10% variation of nominal overload heater rating(overload protection at motor starter may be omitted if motors have built-in protection). Provide starters with quick -make, quick -break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with toggle operated handle with handle lock -off; mount starter in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure. Provide low -voltage protection which shall open the circuit should a power failure occur, and will not reclose without manual operation. -' PART 3 - EXECUTION 5. INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS: 16E-1 5.1 Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 5.2 Coordinate with other work including motor and electrical wiring/ cabling work, as necessary to interface installation of motor starters with other work. 6. APPLICATION: 6.1 Manual Motor Starters: 6.1.1 Provide 30A/1P general -duty switch for fan -powered VAV box. END OF SECTION 16E 16E-2 SECTION 16F SUPPORTING DEVICE'S' PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Support, anchors, sleeves, seals, for electrical raceway systems. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. 2.2 ANSI/ NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". 2.3 MSS Compliance: Comply with applicable MSS standard requirements pertaining to fabrication and installation practices for pipe hangers and supports. 2.4 NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting. 2.5 UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL -listed and labeled. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data:. Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, for each type of support, anchor, sleeve and seal. 3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of fabricated products, indicating details of fabrication and materials. PART 2- PRODUCTS 4. MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES: 4.1 General: Provide 'supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a "- complete installation; and as herein specified. 4.2 Single Conduit, Horizontal: Support with Kindorf Series C-149 adjustable lay -in hangers or approved equal. 16F-1 4.3 Single Surface -Mounted Conduit, Horizontal or Vertical: Support with Kindorf Series HS -400 or approved equal. 4.4 Multiple Surface/Suspended Conduit, Vertical or Horizontal: Support with Kindorf Series B channel and Series C-105 pipe straps. 5. Support Components: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 5.1.1 Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel. 5.1.2 Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2" dia. 5.1.3 Beam Clamps: Kindorf Series 500 or approved equal.4 5.1 Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals as specified in Division -15 section "Pipe, Tube and Fittings". See "Pipe Sleeves" and "Sleeve Seals PART 3 EXECUTION 6.INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES: 6.1 Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of supporting devices. 6.2 Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. 6.3 Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. END OF SECTION 16F 16F-2 SECTION 16G BUILDING LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1 Types of lighting fixtures in the section include the following: Fluorescent. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.1 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of building lighting fixtures. 2.2 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std Pub Nos. LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment. 2.3 ANSI/IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to lighting fixtures. 2.4 UL Compliance: Provide interior lighting fixtures which have been UL -listed and labeled. 2.5 CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting fixtures. 3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" ° alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4. LIGHTING FIXTURES: 4.1 General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring. 4.2 Fluorescent -Lamp Ballasts: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts, capable of operating lamp types indicated; with high power factor, rapid -start, and low -noise features; Type 1; Class P; sound -rated A, and with internal thermal protection. 16G-1 0 4.3 Emergency Ballasts: Provide equal to Bodine. Install in fixture or have provided from factory. Arrange so that ballast has capability of operating one 40W lamp for no less than 1 1/2 hr. Provide with integral charger. 5. LIGHTING FIXTURES: 6.1 "FA" Existing 2x4 fixture to be relocated. 5.1 "FB" Spec grade recessed air -handling troffer. Provide with opposing, rotary -action cam latc es; door from hinged or latched from either side; frame corners screwed together; gasket between door and frame; hinged and latched wireway; pressure -lock lampholders; regressed aluminum frame. Manufacturer: Lithonia Catalog Number: 2SP-440-rw-al2.125-120 Watts: 20OW Lamps: 4-F40RST12CW Mounting: T -Bar 6.1 "FD" Existing 2x2 fixture to be relocated. 6.1 "FE" Spec grade recessed air -handling 2x2 troffer. Provide with opposing, rotary -action cam latches; door—from hinged or latched from either side; frame corners screwed together; gasket between door and frame; hinged and latched wi reway ; pressure -lock 1 amphol ders ; regressed aluminum frame. Manufacturer: Lithonia Catalog Number: 2SP-2U40-rw-al2.125-277 Watts: 10OW Lamps: 2-U4ORST12CW Mounting: T -Bar 6.2 "XA" Emergency power pack 6 -volt exit light. Provide with heavy duty standard long -life maintenance -free sealed lead -calcium battery power pack (capable of operation for a minimum of 1 1/2 hr); two - additional sealed beam heads mounted on side of exit light; buzzer and flasher accessories; black housing. The two additional heads shall be 9 watt sealed beam halogen heads. Manufacturer: Sure -light Catalog Number: EPH-R-I-B-SL(#29-14) Watts: 5OW Lamps: integral Mounting: Wall Heads: 9 watt halogen PART 3 - EXECUTION 16G-2 7. INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES: 7.1 Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. 7.2 Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work. 7.3 Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural support; and check to ensure that solid pendant fixtures are plumb. 7.4 Emergency Ballasts: Provide factory -installed "emergency ballasts" where possible. Provide wiring arrangement so that lights(with emergency ballasts)shown to be switched will activate ballast only during actual power outage. �-- 7.5 Flashing Exit Lights: Route exit lighting circuits through fire alarm control panel so that activation of alarm device will cause the exit lights to flash. 7.6 Install lighting and connect to existing circuit homerun. Remove all other conduit, fitting and hangers. 7.7 Insure that all existing -to -remain light fixtures are powered up at the end of this project and are switched. 8. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 8.1 Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. 8.2 Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 9. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 9.1 Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate operation. Where possible, correct Malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. 10. PROJECT CLOSEOUT: 10.1 At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer. 16G-3 10.2 Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15% (but not less than one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. 11. GROUNDING: 11.1 Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each interior lighting fixture installation where indicated. END OF SECTION 16G 16G-4 Specifications and Contract Documents for CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS ' LEGAL LIBRARY EXPANSION CITY ATTORNEY'S OFFICE SECOND.FLOOR CITY HALL JANUARY 1990 AC Associates Architects • Engineers • Planners (This page left blank intentionally) TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PROPOSAL CONTRACT .., BID BOND PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE EXPERIENCE RECORD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01039 Coordination and Meetings 01041 Project Coordination 01045 Cutting and Patching 01120 Alteration Project Procedures 01300 Submittals �. 01400 Procedures and Controls 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01570 Traffic Regulation 01600 Material and Equipment 01700 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02072 Minor Demolition for New Construction �. DIVISION 3 Not Used — DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS Not Used DIVISION 6 �--^ Not Used DIVISION 7 Not Used TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 DIVISION 8 08210 Wood Doors, Hollow Metal Frames, Hardware DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 Wall Assembly 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09688 Carpet and Base 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories DIVISION 11 Not Used DIVISION 12 Not Used DIVISION 13 Not Used DIVISION 14 Not Used DIVISION 1.5 15000 General Provisions For Mechanical and Electrical 15200 Piping and Accessories 15235 Heating Water Systems 15320 Air Distribution 15330 Hangers and Supports 15400 Insulation 15600 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 15700 Temperature Regulation DIVISION 16 16110 Raceways and Fittings 16120 Conductors 16140 Wiring Devices 16150 Motors and Equipment Controls and Wiring 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects 16450 Grounding 16500 Lighting TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2 SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. -- B. Field engineering. C. Alteration project procedures. D. Preconstruction conference. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01041 - Project Coordination. B. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching. C. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. 1. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. B. FIELD ENGINEERING 1. Contractor to locate and protect survey control and reference points. 2. Establish elevations, lines and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. C. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 1. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. 2. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 1 3. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. 4. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged. 5. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. D. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 1. Owner will schedule a conference after Notice of Award. 2. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor. 3. Agenda: a. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. b. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and Owner. C. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. d. Scheduling. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 2 SECTION 01041 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction mobilization. B. Submittals. C. Closeout procedures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Preconstruction conferences. �- C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract closeout procedures. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION A. Cooperate with the Owner in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for access, traffic, parking facilities, and staging area. B. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Owner. C. Comply with Owner's procedures for intra -project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. D. Comply with instructions of the Owner for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01300 for review and compliance with Contract Documents, or resubmit as required. B. Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through Owner. C. Process requests for substitutions, and change orders, through Owner. �, PROJECT COORDINATION 01041 - 1 1.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Notify Owner when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. Accompany Owner on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's notice of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with Owner's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Owner when Work is considered finally complete. D. Comply with Owner's instructions for completion of items of Work determined by the Architect/Engineer's final inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION PROJECT COORDINATION 01041 - 2 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures: Cutting and patching for alterations work. B. Section 01300 - Submittals. C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Product Options and Substitutions. D. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. ^- C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, to complete work. B. Remove and replace defective or non -conforming work. C. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 3.4 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 2 SECTION 01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES ^^ PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products and installation for patching and extending Work. B. Transition and adjustments. r-. C. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings; 01045 -Cutting and Patching. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Protection of installed work, Cleaning during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. PART 3 EXECUTION ,. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. B. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alternations and renovations to expedite completion. B. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01120 - 1 ZQ to provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to specified condition. C. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. D. Install Products as specified in individual Sections. 3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Owner. 3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.6 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.7 CLEANING A. Cleaning as specified in Section 01500. END OF SECTION ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01120 - 2 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Shop drawings. t-. C. Product data. D. Samples. E. Manufacturers' instructions. '-- F. Manufacturers' certificates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Procedures and Controls. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal on Owner accepted form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; and specification Section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialled certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Owner. Coordinate submission of related items. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance a of the completed Work. G. Provide space for Contractor and Owner review stamps. H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Owner. B. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Owner. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above. 1.6 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes, textures, and patterns for Owner's selection. C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Owner. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 P— 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Owner for review, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation. B. References. C. Field samples. D. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification for Owner. QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 1 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. 1.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for inspection and testing, as specified, by a testing firm approved by the Owner. B. Reports will be submitted to the Owner, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. C. Furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify Owner and testing firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. D. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same testing firm on �- instructions by the Owner. Payment for retesting will be payed by the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. r- END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 2 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, and protection of the Work. C. Construction Facilities: Progress cleaning. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01570 - Traffic Regulations. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's needs for service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Provide power outlets and flexible power cards for construction operations, as required. D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. 1.4 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Contractor will be required to maintain and pay for telephone service as required. 1.5 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. 1.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing facilities may be used. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 1 B. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition than originally found. 1.7 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide dust barriers as required to contain construction generated dust. Keep dust from entering offices. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Protect finished slabs, from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. 1.9 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, from vandalism, or theft. 1.10 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and �., dispose off-site. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 SECTION 01570 TRAFFIC REGULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction Parking Control. B. Flagmen. C. Removal. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings; 01041 - Project Coordination. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 1.3 SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES A. Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by local jurisdictions. B. Flagman Equipment: As approved by local jurisdictions. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access by emergency vehicles, and Owner's operations. B. Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. C. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non- designated areas. 1.5 FLAGMEN A. Provide trained and equipped flagmen to regulate traffic when construction operations or traffic encroach on public traffic lanes. 1.6 FLARES AND LIGHTS A. Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. TRAFFIC REGULATION 01570 - 1 1.7 REMOVAL A. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. B. Repair damage caused by installed equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used �-- END OF SECTION iii ,.- TRAFFIC REGULATION 01570 - 2 p-. SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS NOT APPLICABLE 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 covering. Prevent ventilation to avoid condensation. .. D. Store materials only in Owner designated areas. No storage of construction material will be allowed in existing office area. E. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. - Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution .. for any manufacturer not named. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it ,... meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used 3. The Owner will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Warranties. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. B. General and Supplementary General Conditions 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner's inspection. B. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection including any existing office areas soiled during construction. B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction .- facilities from the site. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Provide written letter or certificate of project warranty as required in General and Supplementary General conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of designated construction. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to Division 1 of the specifications for additional general information relating to the demolition work on this project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. B. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 day prior written notice to the Owner. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction and the events scheduled for this facility. This work shall not cause the facility to be closed during scheduled hours. Contractor to coordinate haul route, dust barriers, and covers with facility representatives in writing prior to starting work. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at all public and service entrances to the construction site. B. Protect existing materials which are not to be demolished. Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any that are damaged with equal material. C. Existing furniture within the construction area will be removed by Owner prior to starting work. Contractor to coordinate with MINOR DEMOLITION FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION 02072 - 1 Owner what furniture must be moved from the construction area and what furniture may stay. Contractor shall protect, cover ... and keep clean any furniture which remains within the construction area. 3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. B. Remove demolished materials from site. Do not burn or bury materials on site. C. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of that day's work, leave areas in clean condition. END OF SECTION MINOR DEMOLITION FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION 02072 - 2 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS, HOLLOW METAL FRAMES, HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Wood doors. B. Hollow Metal door frames. C. Hardware. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 09111 - Wall Assembly. B. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NWMA I.S.1 - Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors (Includes Standards I.S.1.1 through I.I.S.1.7). B. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. C. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. BHMA - Builder's Hardware Manufacturers Association. E. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of AWI Quality Standard Section 1300 and 1400 Economy Grade. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate door elevations, stile and rail reinforcement, internal blocking for hardware attachment. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. WOOD DOORS, HOLLOW METAL FRAMES, HARDWARE 08210 - 1 P- 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Match manufacturer of existing doors, door frames and ., hardware. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 DOOR TYPES .., A. Provide new doors that match existing door dimension thickness (assumed 1 3/4 inches), door construction, door material and finish. New doors shall not be obviously different than existing doors. 2.3 FRAME TYPES A. Provide new door frames of at least 16 gauge steel that match existing door frame dimension and construction. New door frames shall not be obviously different than existing door frames. 2.4 HARDWARE A. New hardware shall match existing hardware design, finish, and quality for doors in similar uses. Include door stops at all new doors. B. Submit a complete hardware schedule for review and approval by the Architect prior to ordering or installing new hardware. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with AWI Quality "^ Standards requirements. WOOD DOORS, HOLLOW METAL FRAMES, HARDWARE 08210 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. — B. Machine cut relief for hinges and coring for handsets and cylinders. — C. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. D. Trim door height by cutting equally on top and bottom edges to _ a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Provide a maximum of 1/4 inch bottom clearance above finished floor. E. Pilot drill screw.and bolt holes. F. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware in accordance with AWI requirements. G. Conform to AWI requirements for fit tolerances. 3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION WOOD DOORS, HOLLOW METAL FRAMES, HARDWARE 08210 - 3 SECTION 09111 WALL ASSEMBLY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES -^ A. Formed metal stud framing. B. Framing accessories. C. Batt Insulation D. Vinyl Faced Gypsum Wall Board E. Wood Blocking ^... F. Gypsum Wall Board 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories B. Section 16110 - Electrical; Raceways and Fittings C. Section 08210 - Wood Doors, Hollow Metal Frames, Hardware 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. B. ANSI/ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated. C. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistant Backing Board. E. FS TT -P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc -Chromate, Alkyd Type. F. GA 203 - Installation of Screw -Type Steel Framing Members to Receive Gypsum Board. "- G. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard WALL ASSEMBLY 09111 - 1 H. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallborad Construction. I. ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the application of Gypsum Sheet Material to Light Gage Steel Studs. J. FS CCC -W-408 - Wall Covering, vinyl coated. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal stud framing system for interior walls, with Batt insulation, gypsum wallboard, and vinyl faced gypsum wallboard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work with other work directly affected by this Section. B. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01041. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. All new material manufacturer's must be the same as existing material manufacturer's. The only exception is if manufacturer is no longer in business. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs: Non -load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access as follows: 1. Width: 2-1/2 inches. 2. Thickness: 25 gage. WALL ASSEMBLY 09111 - 2 B. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs. Ceiling runners with �., extended legs. C. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose. D. Fasteners: Self -drilling, self -tapping screws. E. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. F. Primer: FSTT-P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces. 2.3 BATT INSULATION A. Provide R-11, Kraft faced insulation from the same manufacturer as is already installed in existing adjacent wall cavities which are not yet covered. 2.4 WOOD BLOCKING A. Provide 2 x 6 wood blocking in metal stud framing. 2.5 GYPSUM WALL BOARD A. Provide standard 1/2 inch thick gypsum board with tapered edges. B. Provide joint reinforcing tape, joint compound, and fasteners. 2.6 VINYL FACED GYPSUM WALL BOARD A. Provide 1/2 inch thick gypsum board with factory applied vinyl fabric that match the existing wall covering color,.dimension, and texture. B. Provide all necessary concealed clips, anchors, trim pieces, and accessories for a complete job. PART 3 EXECUTION ..., 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify field measurements are as shown°on Drawings. C. Verify that rough -in utilities are in proper location. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. WALL ASSEMBLY 09111 - 3 3.2 ERECTION A. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches oc. B. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. C. Install studs vertically at 16 inches oc. D. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. E. Construct corners using minimum three studs. F. Double studs at wall openings, door jambs, and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) each side of openings. G. Brace stud framing system and make rigid. H. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frame supports and attachments. I. Align stud web openings. J. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed in or behind stud framing. K. Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of hardware, and built-in equipment. L. Extend stud framing to deck above. M. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection. Fill all wall cavities with insulation. N. Install gypsum wallboard and vinyl faced gypsum wallboard per manufacturer's instructions as shown on drawings. END OF SECTION WALL ASSEMBLY 09111 - 4 SECTION 09511 -- SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical tile. C. Perimeter trim. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section - 15320: Air Distribution. B. Section - 16500: Lighting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings r^ B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. C. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories System Ratings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling tile with three years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of ^" Section 01300. B. Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. C. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. New suspended acoustic ceiling system manufacturer shall match the manufacturer to the existing system in adjacent rooms. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty,'non-f3re rated exposed T components die cut and interlocking. B. Accessories:Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, and edge moldings required for suspended grid system. C. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. D. Grid Finish:White color to match existing. E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized Primed steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS A. New acoustic units shall match existing pattern, color, dimension, and manufacturer. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 2.4 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS A. 'Acoustic Panels: Conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: Match existing. 3. Edge: Square. 4. Surface Color: White. 5. Surface Finish:Match existing pattern. PART 3 EXECUTION -- 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related �., carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units according to reflected plan. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. J. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. K. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. L. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 r - SECTION 09688 CARPET AND BASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpeting. B. Base finish. C. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08210 - Wood Doors, Hollow Metal Frames, Hardware 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics.of Building �. Materials. C. FS DDD -C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic. D. FS DDD -C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene. E. FS DDD -C-1559 - Carpet, Loop, Low Pile Height, High Density, Woven or Tufted with Attached Cushioning. F. FS SS -W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, and direction of carpet. C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical characteristics; sizes, patterns, color, and method of installation. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. CARPET AND BASE 09688 - 1 E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet with three years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. New carpet and base shall match the existing carpet and base as close as possible. Existing carpet is Mohawk "Supertron". New carpet shall be equal to Mohawk "Supertron" also. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet: New carpet shall match existing. If Owner chooses to replace existing with new, Owner shall have first right of refusal on existing carpet. B. Base: New base shall match existing. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet and base manufacturer. C. Carpet Pad: match existing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION CARPET AND BASE 09688 - 2 A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft (3 mm in 3 m) and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. E. Utility access holes in floor are to be covered with a rigid material that allows future access. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply carpet in accordance with manufacturers' instructions over acceptable carpet pad. B. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. E. Locate seams in area of least traffic. F. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. G. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic. H. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of run between rooms under door centerline. I. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. J. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. CARPET AND BASE 09688 - 3 K. Fit base to match wall intersections. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. END OF SECTION CARPET AND BASE 09688 - 4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation B. Surface finish schedule. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 08210 - Wood Doors, Hollow Metal Frames, Hardware B. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASNI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with three years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS �. A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying PAINTING 1 09900 - 1 time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner. B. Label each container with color and locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. 2.2 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish and color schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement PAINTING 09900 - 2 of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below 12 percent D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. B. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by.work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 3.5 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint that is spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary PAINTING 09900 - 3 F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 3.5 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint that is spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.6 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS A. Section 08210 - Wood Doors, Hollow Metal Frames, Hardware: Frames. 1. Color and gloss to match existing door frames B. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories: Cabinet. 1. Color and gloss to match existing door frames. END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900 - 4 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire extinguishers. B. Cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 09111 - Wall Assembly. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. z: 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, and details. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and �-» re -certification requirements. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN. B. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN C. Muckle, Owatonna, MN. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS A. Dry Chemical Type: Steel tank, Model MP10 manufactured by Larsen's with pressure gage. 2.3 CABINETS A. Cabinet: Formed sheet steel, 18 gage, primed, recessed type, size to accommodate extinguisher. B. Trim: Flat, 5/16 inches wide face, primed steel. C. Door: Primed steel, 18 gage thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch access. Larsen's Vertical Duo Model. D. Glass: Solar gray glass. E. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for anchorage. C. Form perimeter trim by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. D. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, 10522 - 2 AND ACCESSORIES 2.5 FINISHES A. Extinguisher: Red enamel. B. Cabinet Trim and Door: Primed. Baked white enamel. C. Cabinet Interior: White enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings 40 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. B. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, 10522 - 3 AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.2 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-1 walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general �. construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and •�- structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc. by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. .,� GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-2 1.3 K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 3. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" or "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-3 or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.4 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.6 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these -- specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. o-, B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-4 enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-5 1.9 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute .. prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS *— A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the a requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. .k; GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-6 C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.11 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.12 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-7 E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. G. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.13 SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC. A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.14 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's "operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.15 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall program his work in such manner as to -- interfere as little as possible with the normal routine of the Owner. It must be understood that thg Owner will continue to function throughout the construction period. All water, electrical and sanitary facilities shall therefore be continued in operation with a minimum of interruption and the Contractor shall make any temporary connections necessary to comply with this requirement. 1.16 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical system which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All . GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-8 such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.17 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.18 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping.systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. C. Markers shall conform completely with "The Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI A131 1981). Markers shall have ANSI specified color coded background, color of legend and legend letter size. D. Markers shall be equal to Seton Set Mark Pipe Markers. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-9 1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in �.., cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.20 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and ^� inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 6. Parts list for all items. 7. Name and address of each vendor. 1.21 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate. 1.22 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. ,.., Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-10 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. END OF SECTION GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-11 SECTION 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL r^- 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, ,.� Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, r� materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. '-' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. w B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the �^ applicable standard. Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. 2.2 VALVES *-� A. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and 0 -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in-line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-1 2.3 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established.at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. E. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-2 3.3 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.4 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-3 SECTION 15235 HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Lines shall be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. C. Connections to Small Coils: Connections to water coils having 3/4" connections and smaller may be served using type "L" soft copper tubing. Provide dielectric unions where steel pipe ends. Use only 95-5 or other high melting solder for these runouts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15235-1 0; 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean the inside of the pipe with a clean cloth as pipe is assembled. END OF SECTION HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15235-2 SECTION 15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class except duct upstream of terminal devices in variable air volume systems shall be in conformance with 2" w.g. pressure class. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-1 W side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with ,.. a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT LINER A. All sheet metal supply air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Johns Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct ... liner coated with neoprene on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq, ft. -degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. E. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-2 2.4 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-3 vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL -181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M -KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M -KE for low pressure application. B. Flex duct shall not exceed 8'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 1-1/2" thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS �. A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type -equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as manufactured by Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. 2.7 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. C. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. D. Where perforated supply grilles or diffusers are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. E. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Metal -Aire, J & J or Krueger will be acceptable. 2.8 FAN POWERED BOX A. Terminal Casing: Furnish and install ENVIRO-TEC CVF-II, or approved equal, fan powered terminal of sizes and capacities indicated on the drawings. Fan terminals shall be constructed AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-4 of not less than 22 -gauge zinc -coated steel, mechanically assembled and sealed to form an air tight casing: maximum air leakage of 2% at 3" w.g. Interior walls of the fan terminal casing shall be lined with 3/4" dual -density fiberglass with four pounds per cubic foot skin density, rated for a maximum air velocity of 4500 fpm. Insulation must meet all requirements of UL 181 and N.F.P.A. 90-A. Raw edges exposed to the airstream shall be coated and sealed. Casing shall have convenient access to interior for component maintenance; the opening shall be sufficiently large to allow complete removal of the unit fan assembly. The fan terminal casing shall be constructed in a manner to provide a single discharge opening for cooling, blending and heating functions. All fan terminals shall include a filter rack with a slide track for filter removal without the use of tools and 1" disposable fiberglass filter. B. Air Control Valve Assembly: Terminal air control valve shall be dual -wall construction, consisting of two metal thicknesses with 3/4" dual -density insulation sandwiched between, creating an effective radiated sound barrier. The control blade of the air valve shall be 16 -gauge, designed to operate through a 45 deg. arc. The control blade shall be bolted or welded to a continuous shaft which rotates in self-lubricating nylon bearings. Blade shall close against a closed -cell gasket seat; it shall be factory preloaded to insure a tight seal. Blade shall not deflect at inlet pressures up to 6" w.g. C. Fan Assembly: Fan assembly shall consist of an 18 -gauge zinc -coated housing with adjustable cut-off and field adjustable discharge/back-draft damper, forwardly curved centrifugal type fan wheel and three -speed permanent split capacitor type motor attached to the fan housing with spring vibration isolators. The fan assembly shall be internally suspended and isolated from casing on rubber -in -shear isolators to further minimize vibration. A three -speed operating switch (high -medium -low) with an on/off position shall be furnished to select the desired speed tap without the need for field rewiring. The fan motor shall be so manufactured to preclude running in backward rotation. All electrical wiring shall be provided by the manufacturer so as to necessitate only a single point electrical connection during installation. All electrical components shall be internally wired to conform with the requirements of UL and N.E.C. Unit shall have been tested and rated by UL or ETL as a complete assembly. Proof of rating shall be required prior to approval. D. Fan terminal shall be furnished with factory mounted controls. See Temperature Regulation for control sequence. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-5 E. Pressure Differential Controller: Pressure differential reset controller shall maintain set point (CFM) within 5%, regardless of system pressure change. The reset controller shall constantly monitor thermostat input, air flow (CFM), system static and total pressure in a manner as to minimize under or over -controlling in relation to the space temperature requirements. The reset controller shall be capable of field adjustment of minimum and maximum CFM settings. Flow curve for field balancing shall be affixed to terminal casing. Differential flow taps and factory -set CFM shall be provided. Controller shall maintain pressure independence to as low as .03" w.g. Averaging sensor shall be mounted in the inlet of the fan terminal and shall provide a minimum of one air pickup point for each 2-1/2" of inlet diameter. F. Induction Port Sound Baffle: Fan terminals shall include an induction port sound baffle internally insulated with 3/4" dual -density fiberglass with four pounds per cubic foot skin density, rated for a maximum air.velocity of 4500 fpm. Insulation must meet all requirements of UL 181 and N.F.P.A. 90-A. Raw edges exposed to the airstream shall be coated and sealed. Induction port baffle shall be constructed of not less than 22 -gauge zinc -coated steel and shall be designed to be an integral part of the fan terminals unitized construction. The sound baffle shall be certified to produce a minimum 5 dB reduction in radiated noise levels. G. Hot Water Coils: Fan terminals shall include a hot water coil. Coil shall be attached to the induction port of the fan terminal in a manner so as to allow removal for maintenance or cleaning. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins. Fins shall be mechanically fixed to copper tubes. Coils shall be tested at 400 p.s.i.g. END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-6 SECTION 15330 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, — Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. _. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 - Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Adjuster All 2381 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel pipe or Copper Tube Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-1 P; 2.3 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced. Where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or requried by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS rA. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be ., installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not exceeding 1/2" and for loads of 200 lbs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 lbs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. C. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. D. Hangers supporting insulated lines shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation on horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge W., galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom half of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type fully encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/4" wide lacquered steel band at each end. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-2 3.2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-3 Gia PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 15400 INSULATION 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, .� Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. ^-^ C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. INSULATION 15400-1 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following: 1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white draft paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper. 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001" aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. -On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams with a double tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system. If a single tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system is used, an additional layer of Benjamin Foster 82-07 vapor barrier lap adhesive must be used. Tightly butt the ends of the pipe covering and apply the 4" wide butt strips as provided by the insulation manufacturer. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. INSULATION 15400-2 P_ B. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15400-3 SECTION 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 2 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-1 G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: �-- 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 5. Motor current readings at each fan. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION „., TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-2 SECTION 15700 TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover an extention of the existing automatic temperature regulating system. It is intended that the system be pneumatic in its operation. It shall include all thermostats, valves, and operators, piping, relays, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. B. The wiring for all the remote temperature indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in a terminal board and extend to and connect to all relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Contractor under Division 16 in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. C. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic valves. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all valve operators and all other relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15700-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. All exposed tubing and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure and shall be concealed in all finished spaces. a-- B. Hard drawn copper tubing shall be used where run exposed and either hard drawn or annealed where concealed. Only tool -made bends will be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder -joint type, except at connections to apparatus, where brass compression -type fittings shall be used. C. Non-metallic tubing may be used in lieu of copper only inside control cabinets or for flexibility with short runs (24" maximum) to controls, and shall be virgin polyethylene, meeting stress -crack test ASTM D1693 -60T.* Tubing shall be self -extinguishing under ASTM -D635 flammability test. 2.2 THERMOSTATS A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting two pipe type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished areas shall have plain cases and concealed adjustments unless specifically described otherwise herein. D. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the operation of any instrument would be improved by changing its location, he shall so notify the Architect. With the Architect's approval, he shall install the thermostat in the location of his choice. 2.3 CONTROL VALVES, WATER " A. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling Plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring-loaded teflon .r packing. 0-- TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15700-2 C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.4 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. 3.2 FAN POWERED BOX A. These units have an integral fan and motor and primary air damper. The unit manufacturer will furnish normally open damper operators. This contractor shall provide a modulating three way valve in the coil outlet and thermostat. B. When the air handling unit fan starts, an air static switch furnished by the unit manufacturer starts the unit blower. C. If the discharge temperature is below the required setpoint, the primary air damper shall modulate toward the closed position. As the primary air quantity decreases, a proportionate amount is taken from the return air plenum to allow a constant volume of air to be delivered by the unit. When the damper is fully closed and all air is being recirculated from the return plenum, the three way valve shall modulate open to the coil to offset the heat loss. 3.3 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15700-3 provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive ,.„ maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence. �. 3.4 GUARANTEE A. The temperature regulation subcontractor shall guarantee all workmanship and material in the temperature regulation system for a period of one year, such guarantee dating from the date of the final acceptance of the entire air conditioning system by the Architect. M.. �-. END OF SECTION gm - .w TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15700-4 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. 2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-1 B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and M. connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 2.3 WIREWAYS A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.4 OUTLET BOXES A. UL listed of sizes and types specified. B. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. C. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National. 2.5 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. PART 3 - EXECUTION -^ 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. All conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. P_ RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-2 B. Types: Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits. In sizes up to and including 1-1/2", electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage. EMT may be used in air conditioned spaces, such as accessible ceilings, dry wall partitions and exposed where 6' above the floor. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed 1-ighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing -raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same compartment. G. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. H. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-3 I. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. 3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS .. A. Support spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical conduit risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U -bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster. ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1 -1/4" -are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. B. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. .., RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-4 D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 41'x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box. F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, including pulling devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) ,. A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, THHN or �- THWN insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. 2.2 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. CONDUCTORS 16120-1 B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 2.3 COLOR CODING A. Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. B. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. C. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. D. Phase conductors shall be yellow, brown and orange for phases A, B, and C respectively in the 480 volt system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE PULLING A. Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end CONDUCTORS 16120-2 of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other .� end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3 -wire circuit or one 4 -wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. B. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National- Electrical Code. C. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. D. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. E. Home runs on 277 volt, 20 amps Lighting Branching Circuits: ,., Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 175 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. F. Power and Lighting circuits of different system voltages (eg. 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the same conduit. G. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty. H. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. �^ CONDUCTORS 16120-3 I. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. J. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. K. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS 16120-4 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL �^ 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, �. Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.2 WALL SWITCHES A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO a. Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-I b. Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-I C. Four-way wall switch 1204 or 1204-I WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 2.3 2.4 B. For loads exceeding above listing: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. a. Single pole wall switch 1221 or 1221-I b. Three-way wall switch 1223 or 1223-I C. Four-way wall switch 1224 or 1224-I RECEPTACLES A. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5262 or 5262-I (NEMA 5-15R). OTHER DEVICES A. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Coverplates will be furnished by the Telephone Company. Where an outlet is shown, and it does not receive a telephone instrument, install a blank coverplate. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 SECTION 16150 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS �- A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment .� ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT WIRING �^ A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner of under other Divisions of the specifications. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. ,_, MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16150-1 B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. 3.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. END OF SECTION MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16150-2 SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL �-- 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.3 MANUALS A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 SCOPE A-. A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical -distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches - shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1983 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be fused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. END OF SECTION CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16170-1 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all products. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING RACEWAYS A. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. B. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to GROUNDING 16450-1 pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. END OF SECTION GROUNDING 16450-2 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTALLATION A. Interior Lighting Fixtures: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. C. Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40 watt, rapid start ballasts installed in an interior space where the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be General Electric "Watt -Miser" or equivalent energy saving ballast. The ballast shall be high power factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A" sound rating. D. Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. LIGHTING 16500-1 E. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. F. Fluorescent Lamps: Reduced wattage type General Electric Watt -Miser Cool White. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with -^ the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed clips. -.. C. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. D. Reused Fixtures: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and store the fixture. When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the fixture and lens, hang the fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be damaged in this process replace them with matching new ones at no cost to the owner. END OF SECTION I .. LIGHTING 16500-2 (This page left blank intentionally) SPECIAL CONDITIONS -43- (This page left blank intentionally) TO: NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the _day of 199, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 198_ at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, cer- tificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the con- tract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. .� The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be re- tained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Owner's Representative -44- (This page left blank intentionally) I CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS for GENERAL FEDERAL REVENUE SHARING PROJECT TITLE: MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS ADDRESS: 1625 13TH STREET PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department PROJECT NUMBER: 1481-552101-9144 BID NUMBER: 10566 (This page left blank intentionally) INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS "p 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. SPECIFICATIONS 10. EXHIBITS r. A. Copeland Anti -Kickback Regulations ^-- B. Davis -Bacon Wage Determination 11. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE (This page left blank intentionally) 0 3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following: MUNICIPAL BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS ON THE TRAINING ROOM. The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shalt be done in accordance with contract documents described in *— the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents �.. and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY) calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor wilt be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 4 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within one year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished _1_ set of drawings, specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 52 0 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 1 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shalt be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 18. PREPARATION OR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. if a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a seated envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 1.1 19. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. ... (j) ALL other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. (This page left blank-intentionally) BID PROPOSAL BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE r , DATE PROJECT NO. Proposal of (Hereinafter called Bidder) �•• To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas. (Hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of: a training room. having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of the materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be a part, is as follows: BID: ($ ) .� (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 calendar days as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $100.00 for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. 0 r— The Bidder agrees that this bid shalt be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Contractor By (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary PAYMENT BOND (APPLICABLE ON ALL CONTRACTS IN EXCESS OF $25,000) (To be used in Texas under V.A.T.S. 5160) THE STATE OF COUNTY OF _ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: That we (1) , (2) of hereinafter called Principal and (3) , of ,State of , hereinafter called the surety, are held and firmly bound unto (4) , of , hereinafter called owner, and unto all persons, firms, and corporations who may furnish materials for, or perform labor upon the building or improvements hereinafter referred to into the penal sum of (5 ) dollars in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in (5) ,for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contact with (6) The Owner, dated the day of A.D. 19 a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall promptly make payment of all claimants as defined in Article 5160 Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, 1925, as amended by House Bill 344, Acts 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, effective April 27, 1959, and as further amended by Acts 1969, 61st Legislature, p. 1390, ch. 422, Sect. 1, effective June 2, 1969, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. This bond is made and entered into solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, and all such claimants shall have a direct right of action under the bond as provided in Article 5160, Revised Civil Statutes 1925, as amended by House Bill 344, Acts 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and as further amended by Acts 1969, 61st Legislature, p. 1390, ch. 422, Sect. 1, effective June 2, 1969. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie County, State of Texas, and that the said surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration of addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. 10 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in six counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , A.D. 19 Principal ATTEST: (Principal) Secretary By (Seal) Witness as to Principal (Address) (Address) ATTEST: (Surety) Secretary BY (Seal) Witness as to Surety (Address) NOTE: If Contractor is Partnership, all partners should execute bond. These footnotes refer to the numbers in bond of contract above: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of contract (1) Correct name of Contractor (4) Correct Name of Owner (2) A Corporation, a Partnership (5) County and State or an Individual, as case (b) Owner may be (3) Correct Name of Surety 11 APPROVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney 12 (This page left blank intentionally) 0 PERFORMANCE BOND (Application on all contracts in excess of $25,000) (To be used in Texas under V.A.T.S. 5160) THE STATE OF COUNTY OF KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: that we (1) a (2) of hereinafter called Principal and (3) of State ,here in after called the Surety, are hereby and firmly bound into (4) of hereinafter called Owner, in the .-� penal sum of (S ) Dollars in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in (5) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with (6 ) the Owner, dated the _ day of A.D. 19 _, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: (herein called the "work"). These footnotes refer to the numbers in body of contract above: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract (1) Correct name of Contractor (2) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual, as case may be (3) Correct name of Surety (4) Correct name of Owner (5) County and State (6) Owner (Texas Performance Bond) - 2 NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 13 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall tie County, State of Texas, and that change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in six counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of A.D. 19 Principal ATTEST By (Principal) Secretary (SEAL) Witness as to Principal (Address) ATTEST: (Surety) Secretary (SEAL) By Witness as to Surety (Address) 14 APPROVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney NOTE: If Contractor is Partnership, all partners should execute bond. ri4 15 (This page left blank intentionally) CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas DATE: Type of Project: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this Company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE Policy No. Effective Expires Limits of Liability Workmen's Compensation --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Owner's Protec- Per Person $ tive or Contin- Per Occurrence $ gent Liability --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Contractor's Per Person $ Protective or Per Occurrence $ Contingent Liability -------------------- Automobile Per Occurrence $ �.. Property Damage $ --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Comprehensive General Liability --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Umbrella Liability $ --------------------------------------------------------------------------- The foregoing Policies (do) (do not) cover all sub -contractors. Locations Covered DESCRIPTION of Operations Covered r» The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THIS CERTIFICATE MUST BE SENT TO THE OWNER. (Name of Insurer) By: Title: 16 (This page left blank intentionally) 21 INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. OWNER n-� 2. CONTRACTOR 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ,►- 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES 6. SUBCONTRACTOR 7. WRITTEN NOTICE 8. WORK �-. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED 10. LAYOUT OF WORK 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY AND HUD INSPECTION 13. LINES AND GRADES 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY r-, 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTIONS 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT 20. SANITATION 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES r-- 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS 24. EXTRA WORK 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT 22 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE 29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES 30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION 31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES 32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING 33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION 35. EXTENSION OF TIME 36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS 37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS 38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY 39. PRICE FOR WORK 40. PAYROLLS AND BASIC PAYROLL RECORDS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS 41. MINIMUM WAGES 42. POSTING WAGE DETERMINATION DECISION AND AUTHORIZED WAGE DEDUCTIONS 43. EMPLOYMENT OF LABORERS OR MECHANICS NOT LISTED IN AFORESAID WAGE DETERMINATION DECISION 44. SPECIFIC COVERAGE OF CERTAIN TYPES OF WORK BY EMPLOYEES 45. UNDERPAYMENTS OF WAGES OR SALARIES 46. ANTICIPATED COSTS OF FRINGE BENEFITS 47. FRINGE BENEFITS NOT EXPRESSED AS HOURLY WAGE RATES 48. OVERTIME COMPENSATION REQUIRED BY CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT (76 STAT. 357-360: TITLE 40 U.S.C., SECTIONS 327-332) 49. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES/TRAINEES 50. EMPLOYMENT OF CERTAIN PERSONS PROHIBITED 51. REGULATIONS PURSUANT TO SO-CALLED "ANTI -KICKBACK ACP' 52. COMPLAINTS, PROCEEDINGS, OR TESTIMONY BY EMPLOYEES r - a -- 53. CLAIMS AND DISPUTES PERTAINING TO WAGE RATES 54. QUESTIONS CONCERNING CERTAIN FEDERAL STATUTES AND 55. PAYMENTS 56. PARTIAL PAYMENTS 57. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE 58. FINAL PAYMENT 59. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK 60. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT 61. PAYMENT WITHHELD 62. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS 63. ARBITRATION 64. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR 65. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER 66. BONDS 67. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 68. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES 69. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR 70. CLEANING UP 71. SPECIAL EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROVISIONS 72. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH AIR AND WATER ACTS REGULATIONS 23 (This page.left blank intentionally) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER 25 Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: , who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to: JERRY SMITH, DIRECTOR OF BUILDING SERVICES,BUILDING SERVICES, CITY OF LUBBOCK, P. 0. BOX 2000, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 -TELEPHONE 806-767-2853 under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, ... Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed,', or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of �., various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR 26 The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, tabor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. ALL work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative wilt check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with _ONE copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shalt keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY AND HUD INSPECTION The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the NV/ Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his on-site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work .•- contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The �-- Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to limit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Repre- sentative shalt, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shalt, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by "^ such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be .� promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shalt be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish atl reasonable aid and assistance required »- by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate m engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Wa 29 The owner will provide such right-of-way and working easements as are indicated on the ,-� construction plans for the project. Any additional working space other than that indicated on the project plans shall be obtained by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner . If the Contractor deems it necessary to obtain additional space for materials storage of for any other reason, the Contractor shall protect and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims resulting from the use of encroachments upon or damage to such property. Further, before final payment the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written statement from each landowner whose property was used indicating that the property was restored to a condition satisfactory to such landowner. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING .�- The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shalt ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and *- Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shalt be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or " approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES 30 it is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shalt perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sun; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. 31 Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's -- Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated. General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the �. written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefor, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. r-- 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT ,.., If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, ^" to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC 32 The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with,limits of $300,000 Bodily Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. 33 B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for .. Property Damage. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shalt have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not Less than; ^^ Bodily Injury 250/500,00 Property Damage $100,000 to include all owned and non -owned cars including Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of naming the (100% of potential loss) City of Lubbock as insured. E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance ^^ The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of with ($1,000,000 minimum) coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 limit. 34 G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five- Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be cancelled only by maiting written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. 29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INFRINGEMENT The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any Loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product 35 of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any mariner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners, Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such Laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby -^ agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of ONE HUNDRED Dollars ($100.00), not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. 36 The amount is fixed and agreed upon -by and between the Contractor and the owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 35. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 37 36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such .�._ expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed Length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is .� the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to '^ be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold „.e harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 39. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion "^ of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 40. PAYROLLS AND BASIC PAYROLL RECORDS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS Bu ME: The Contractor and each subcontractor shall prepare his payrolls on forms satisfactory to and in accordance with instructions to be furnished by the Local Public Agency or Public Body. The Contractor shall submit weekly to the Local Public Agency or Public Body two certified copies of all payrolls of the Contractor and of the subcontractors, it being understood that the Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls of all subcontractors. Each such payroll shall contain the "Weekly Statement of Compliance set forth in Section 3.3 of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. The payrolls and basic payroll records of the Contractor and each subcontractor covering all laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contractor shall be maintained during the course of the work and preserved for a period of 3 years thereafter. Such payrolls and basic payroll records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, his correct classification, rate of pay (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated of the types described in Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. In addition, whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under Section 5.5(a)91)(iv) of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, that the wages of any Laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the Contractor or subcontractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall make his employment records with respect to persons employed by him upon the work covered by this Contractor available for inspection by authorized representatives of the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, the Local Public Agency or Public Body, and the United States Department of Labor. Such representatives shall be permitted to interview employees of the Contractor or of any subcontractor during working hours on the job. 41. MINIMUM WAGES (See Exhibit B: In excess of $2,000) All laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contract shall be paid unconditionally and not less often than once each week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are made mandatory by law and such other payroll deductions as are permitted by the applicable regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, pursuant to the Anti -Kickback Act hereinafter identified), the full amount due at time of payment computed at wage rates not less than those contained in the wage determination decision of said Secretary of Labor (a copy of which is included in Exhibit B) regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor or any subcontractor and such laborers and mechanics. All laborers and mechanics employed upon such work shall be paid in cash, except that payment may be by check if the employer provides or secures satisfactory facilities approved by the Local Public Agency or Public Body for the cashing of the same without cost or expense to the employee. For the purpose of this clause, contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of Section 5.50)(1)(iv) of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. Also for the purpose of this clause, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period under plans, funds, or programs, but covering the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. 42. POSTING WAGE DETERMINATION DECISIONS AND AUTHORIZED WAGE DEDUCTIONS The applicable wage poster of the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, and the applicable wage determination decisions of said Secretary of Labor with respect to the various classification of laborers and mechanics employed and to be employed upon the work covered by this Contract, and a statement showing all deductions, if any, in accordance with the provisions of this r-- 39 Contract, to be made from wages actually earned by persons so employed or to be employed in such classifications, shall be posted at appropriate conspicuous points at the site of the work. 43. EMPLOYMENT OF LABORERS OR MECHANICS NOT LISTED IN AFORESAID WAGE DETERMINATION DECISION Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the Contract will be classified or reclassified conformably to the wage determination by the Local Public Agency or Public body, and a report of the action taken shall be submitted by the Local Public Agency or Public Body, through the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor. In the event the interested parties cannot agree on the proper classification or reclassification of a particular class of laborers and mechanics to be used, the question accompanied by the recommendation of the Local Public Agency or Public Body shall be referred to the Secretary of Labor for final determination. 44. SPECIFIC COVERAGE OF CERTAIN TYPES OF WORK BY EMPLOYEES The transporting of materials and supplies to or from the site of the Project or Program to which this Contract pertains by the employees of the Contractor or of any subcontractor, and the w- manufacturing or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies, or equipment on the site of the Project or Program to which this Contract pertains by person employed by the Contractor or by any subcontractor, shall, for the purposes of this Contractor, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing provisions of this Contract, be deemed to be work to which these Federal Labor Standards Provisions are applicable. 45. UNDERPAYMENTS OF WAGES OR SALARIES In case of underpayment of wages by the Contractor or by any subcontractor to laborers or mechanics employed by the Contractor or subcontractor upon the work covered by this Contract, the Local Public Agency or Public Body in addition to such other rights as may be afforded it under this Contract shall withhold from the Contractor, out of any payments due the Contractor, so much thereof as the Local Public Agency or Public Body may consider necessary to pay such laborers or mechanics the full amount of wages required by this Contract. The amount so withheld may be disbursed by the Local Public Agency or Public Body for and on account of the Contractor or the subcontractor (as may be appropriate), to the respective laborers or mechanics to whom the same is due or on their behalf to plans, funds, or programs for any type of fringe benefit prescribed in the applicable determination. 46. ANTICIPATED COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, he may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing fringe benefits under a plan or program of a type expressly listed in the wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor which is a part of this Contract: Provided, however, the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. A copy of any findings made by the Secretary of Labor in respect to fringe benefits being provided by the Contractor must be submitted to the Local Pubic Agency or Public Body with the first payroll filed by the Contractor subsequent to receipt of the findings. 47. FRINGE BENEFITS NOT EXPRESSED AS HOURLY WAGE RATES The Local Public Agency or Public Body shall require, whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the Contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly wage rate and the Contractor is obligated to pay cash equivalent of such a fringe 40 benefit, an hourly cash equivalent thereof to be established. In the event the interested parties cannot agree upon a cash equivalent of the fringe benefit, the question, accompanied by the recommendation of the Local Public Agency or Public Body, shalt be referred to the Secretary of Labor for determination. 48. OVERTIME COMPENSATION REQUIRED BY CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT (76 STAT. 357-360: TITLE 40 U.S.C., SECTIONS 327-332) (a) Overtime requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the Contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics, including watchmen and guards, shalt require or permit any laborer or mechanic in any work week in which he is employed on such work to work in excess of 8 hours in any calendar day or in excess of 40 hours in such work week unless such taborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times his basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 8 hours in any calendar day or in excess of 40 hours in such work week, as the case may be. (b) Violation: Liability for unpaid wages liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a), the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable to any affected employee for his unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic employed in violations of the clause set forth in paragraph (a), in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such employee was required or permitted to work in excess of 8 hours or in excess of the standard work week of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (a). (c) Withholding for liquidated damages. The Local Public Agency or Public Body shall withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor, such sums as may administratively be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b). (d) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this Section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts which they may enter into, together with a clause requiring this insertion in any further subcontracts that may in turn be made. 49. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES/TRAINEES (a) Apprentices wilt be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Manpower Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to his entire work force under the registered program. Any employee listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not a trainee as defined in subdivision (b) of this subparagraph or is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid the wage rate determined by 41 the Secretary of Labor for the classification of work he actually performed. The contractor or subcontractor will be required to furnish to the contracting officer or a representative of the Wage -Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor written evidence of the registration of his program and apprentices as well as the appropriate ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeymen hourly rates), for the area of construction prior to using any apprentice on the contract work. The wage rate paid apprentices shall be not less than the appropriate percentage of the journeyman's rate contained in the applicable wage determination. (b) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.15 trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification, by the U.S. Department of Labor, Manpower Administration, Bureau of Apprentice and Training. The ratio of trainees to journeymen shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Bureau of Apprenticeship ►- and Training. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for his level of progress. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training shall be paid not less than the wage rate determined by the Secretary of Labor for the classification of work he actually performed. The contractor or subcontractor will be required to furnish the contracting officer or a representative of the Wage -Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor written evidence of the certification of his program, the registration of the trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in that program. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be ..., permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved (c) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. Cha 50. EMPLOYMENT OF CERTAIN PERSONS PROHIBITED No person under the age of sixteen years and no person who, at the time, is serving sentence in a penal or correctional institution shall be employed on the work covered by this contract. 51. REGULATIONS PURSUANT TO SO-CALLED "ANTI -KICKBACK ACT" The Contractor shall comply with the applicable regulations (see Exhibit A a copy of which is attached and herein incorporated by reference) of the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, made pursuant to the so-called "Anti -Kickback Act" of June 13, 1934 (48 Stat. 948:62 Stat. 862: Title U.S.C., Section 874; and Title 40 U.S.C., Section 276c), and any amendments or modifications thereof, shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in subcontracts to insure compliance therewith by all subcontractors subject thereto, and shall be responsible for the submission of affidavits required by subcontractors thereunder, except as said Secretary of Labor may specifically provide for reasonable limitations, variations, tolerances, and exemptions from the requirements thereof. 52. COMPLAINTS PROCEEDINGS, OR TESTIMONY BY EMPLOYEES No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary, or other labor standards provisions of this Contract are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner discriminated against by the Contractor or any subcontractor because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding or has testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or relating to the labor standards applicable under this Contract to his employer. 53. CLAIMS AND DISPUTES PERTAINING TO WAGE RATES Claims and disputes pertaining to wage rates or to classifications of laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contract shall be promptly reported by the Contractor in writing to the Local Public Agency or Public Body for referral by the latter to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, whose decision shall be final with respect thereto. 54. QUESTIONS CONCERNS CERTAIN FEDERAL STATUTES AND REGULATIONS All questions arising under this Contract which relate to the application or interpretation of (a) the aforesaid Anti -Kickback Act, (b) the Contract Work House and Safety Standards Act, (c) the aforesaid David -Bacon act, (d) the regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, pursuant to said Acts, or (e) the labor standards provisions of any other pertinent Federal statue, shall be referred, through the Local Public Agency or Public Body to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, for said Secretary's appropriate ruling or interpretation which shall be authoritative and may be relied upon for the purposes of this Contract. 55. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 43 56. PARTIAL PAYMENTS r+� On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be .... fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 10% of the amount thereof, which 10% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 57. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or sub- stantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shalt *^ issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 58. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of alt work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shalt certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 30th calendar day after the date of certificate of completion, the �.. balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final a.. payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 59. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 60. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT 44 Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 61. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or Labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 62. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shalt be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 63. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the decision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award 45 by the arbiters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 64. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shalt not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. �•., In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion herein before provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: P -- (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, toots, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shalt be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sun which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the d^ contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less 46 than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 calendar days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 65. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 66. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed 47 The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shalt be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 67. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 68. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in .� the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 69. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other perogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 70. CLEANING UP The Contractor shalt at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris andcharge the cost to the Contractor. 71. SPECIAL EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROVISIONS A. Activities and Contracts Not Subject to Executive Order 11246, As Amended. (Applicable to Federal assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts under ..-. $10,000) During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. the --. Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants for employment are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment advertising; layoff termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection of or training, including apprenticeship. (2) The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by Contracting Officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The Contractor shall state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. (3) Contractors shall incorporate foregoing requirements in all subcontracts. B. Contracts Subiect to Executive Order 11246, As Amended. (Applicable to Federal assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding $10,000) During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. (3) The Contractor will send to each tabor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the Contract Compliance officer advertising the said tabor union or workers' representatives of the Contractor's commitment under this section and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965,and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the Department and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract, or with any of such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federal assisted construction contract 49 procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulations, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by laws. (7) The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with ..�. respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the Department may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however that in the event a Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the Department, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. 72. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH AIR AND WATER ACTS (Applicable to Federal assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding $100,000) Compliance with Air and Water Acts During the performance of this contract, the contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the requirements of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 USC 1857 et seq., and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 USC 1251 et seq., and the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency with respect thereto, at 40 CFR Part 15, as amended. In addition to the foregoing requirements, all nonexempt contractors and subcontractors shall furnish to the owner, the following: (1) A stipulation by the Contractor or subcontractors, that any facility to be utilized in the performance of any nonexempt contract or subcontract, is not listed on the List of Violating Facilities issued by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pursuant to 40 CFR 15.20. (2) Agreement by the contractor to comply with all the requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act, as amended, (42 USC 1857c-8) and Section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, (33 USC 1318) relating to inspection, monitoring, entry, reports and information, as well as all other requirements specified in said Section 114 Section 308, and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder. (3) A stipulation that as a condition for the award of the contract, prompt notice will be given of any notification received from the Director, Office of Federal Activities, EPA, ^'^ indicating that a facility utilized, or to be utilized for the contracts, is under consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities. (4) Agreement by the Contractor that he will include, or cause to be include, the criteria and requirements in paragraph (1) through (4) of this section in every nonexempt subcontract and requiring that the Contractor will take such action as the Government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. r 50 EXHIBIT A ATTACHMENT TO FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS SO-CALLED "ANTI -KICKBACK ACT" AND REGULATIONS PROMULGATED PURSUANT THERETO BY THE SECRETARY OF LABOR, UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR TITLE 18, U.S., SECTION 874 (Replaces Section 1 of the Act of June 13, 1934 (48 Stat. 948,40 U.S.C. Sec. 276b) pursuant tot he Act of June 25, 1948, 62 Stat. 862) KICKBACKS FROM PUBLIC FORKS EMPLOYEES Whoever, by force, intimidation, or threat of procuring dismissal from employment, or by any other manner whatsoever induces any person employed in the construction, prosecution, completion or repair of any public building, public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States, to give up any part of the compensation to which he is entitled under his contract of employment, shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than five years, or both. SECTION 2 OF THE ACT OF JUNE 13, 1934, AS AMENDED (48 Stat. 948, 62 Stat. 862, 63 Stat. 108, 72 Stat. 967, 40 U.S.C., Sec 276c) The Secretary of Labor shall make reasonable regulations for contractors and subcontractors engaged in the construction, prosecution, completion or repair of public buildings, public works or buildings or works financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States, including a provision that each contractor and subcontractor shall furnish weekly a statement with respect to the wages paid each employee during the preceding week. Section 1001 of Title 18 (United States Code) shall apply to such statements. Pursuant to the aforesaid Anti -Kickback Act, the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, has promulgated the regulations hereinafter set forth, which regulations are found in Title 29, Subtitle A, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 3. The term "this part", as used in the regulations hereinafter set forth, refers to Part 3 last above mentioned. Said regulations read as follows: 51 TITLE 29 - LABOR Subtitle A - Office of the Secretary of Labor PART 3 -CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS ON PUBLIC BUILDING OR PUBLIC WORK FINANCED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY LOANS OR GRANTS FROM THE UNITED STATES Section 3.1 Purpose and scope. This part prescribes "anti -kickback" regulations under section 2 of the Act of June 13, 1934, as amended (40 U>S.C. 276c), popularly known as the Copeland Act. This part applies to any contract which is subject to Federal wage standards and which is for the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of public buildings, public works or buildings or works financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States. The part is intended to aid in the enforcement of the minimum wage provisions of the Davis -Bacon Act and the various statutes dealing with Federal -assisted construction that contain similar minimum wage provisions, including those provisions which are not subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 (e.g., the College Housing Act of 1950, the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, and the Housing Act of 1959), and in the enforcement of the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours Standards Act whenever they are applicable to construction work. The part details the obligation of contractors and subcontractors relative to the weekly submission of statements regarding the wages paid on work covered thereby; sets forth the circumstances and procedures governing the making of payroll deductions from the wages of those employed on such work; and delineates the methods of payment permissable on such work. Section 3.2 Definitions. As used in the regulations in this part: (a) The terms "buildings" or "work" generally includes construction activity as distinguished from manufacturing, furnishing of materials, or servicing and maintenance work. The terms include, without Limitation, buildings, structures, and improvements of all types, such as bridges, dams, plants, highways, parkways, streets, subways, tunnels, sewers, mains, powerlines, pimping stations, railways, airports, terminals, docks, piers, wharves, ways, lighthouses, buoys, jetties, breakwaters, levees, and canals; dredging, shoring, scaffolding, drilling, blasting, excavating, clearing, and landscaping. Unless conducted in connection with and at the site of such a building or work as is described in the foregoing sentence, the manufacture or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies, or equipment (whether or not a Federal or State agency acquires title to such materials, articles, supplies, or equipment during the course of the manufacture or furnishing, or owns the materials from which they are manufactured or furnished (is not a -- "building" or "work" within the meaning of the regulations in this part. (b) The terms "condition", "prosecution", "completion", or "repair", mean all types of work -- done on a particular building or work at the site thereof, including, without limitation, altering, remodeling, painting and decorating, the transporting of materials and supplies to or from the building or work by the employees of the construction contractor or construction subcontractor, and the manufacturing or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies, or equipment on the site of the building or work, by persons employed at the site by the contractor or subcontractor. (c) The terms "public building" or "public work" include building or work for whose construction, prosecution, completion, or repair, as defined above, a Federal agency is a contracting party, regardless of whether title thereof is in a federal agency. .- (d) The term "building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States" includes building or work for whose construction, prosecution, completion, or repair, as defined above, payment or part payment is made directly or indirectly from funds provided by loans or grants by a Federal agency. The term does not include building or work for which Federal assistance is limited sole to Loan guarantees or insurance. 457 (e) Every person paid by a contractor or subcontractor is any manner for his labor in the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of a public building or public work or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States is "employed" and receiving "wages", regardless of any contractual relationship alleged to exist between him and the real employer. (f) The term "any affiliated person" includes a spouse, child,parent, or other close relative of the contractor or subcontractor, a partner or officer of the contractor or subcontractor, a corporation closely connected with the contractor or subcontractor as parent, subsidiary or otherwise, and an officer or agent of such corporation. (g) The term "Federal agency" means the United States, the District of Columbia, and all executive departments, independent establishments, administrative agencies, and instrumentalities of the United States and of the District of Columbia, including corporations, all or substantially all of the stock of which is beneficially owned by the United States, by the District of Columbia, or any of the foregoing departments, establishments, agencies, and instrumentalities. Section 3.3 Weekly statement with respect to payment of wages. (a) As used in this section, the term "employee" shall not apply to persons in classifications higher than that of laborer or mechanic and those who are the immediate supervisors of such employees. (b) Each contractor or subcontractor engaged in the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of any public building or public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States, shall furnish each week a statement with respect to the wages paid each of its employees engaged on work covered by 29 CFR Parts 3 and 5 during the preceeding weekly payroll period. This statement shall be executed by the contractor or subcontractor or by an authorized officer or employee of the contractor or subcontractor who supervises the payment of wages, and shall be on form WH 348 "Statement of Compliance", or on an identical form on the back of WH 347, "Payroll (For Contractors Optional Use)" or on any form with identical wording. Sample copies of WH 347 and WH 348 may be obtained from the Government contracting or sponsoring agency, and copies of these forms may be purchased at the Government Printing Office. (c) The requirements of this section shall not apply to any contract of $2,000 or less. (d) Upon a written finding by the head of a Federal agency, the Secretary of Labor may provide reasonable limitations, variations, tolerances, and exemptions from the requirements of this section subject to such conditions as the Secretary of Labor may specify.(29 F.R. 95, Jan. 4, 1964, as amended at 33 F.R. 100186, July 17, 1968) Section 3.4 Submission of weekly statements and the preservation and inspection of weekly payroll records. (a) Each weekly statement required under Section 3.3 shall be delivered by the contractor or subcontractor, within seven days after the regular payment date of the payroll period, to a representative of a Federal or State agency in charge at site of the building or work, or, if there is no representative of a Federal or State agency at the site of the building or work, the statement shall be mailed by the contractor or subcontractor, within such time, to a Federal or State agency contracting for or financing the building or work. After such examination and check as may made, such statement, or a copy thereof, shall be kept available, or shall be transmitted together with a report of any violation, in accordance with applicable procedures prescribed by the United States Department of Labor. (b) Each contractor or subcontractor shalt preserve his weekly payroll records for a period of three years from date of completion of the contract. The payroll records shall set out accurately and completely the name and address of each laborer and mechanic, his correct classification, rate of pay, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Such payroll records shall be 53 made available at all times for inspection by the contracting officer or his authorized representative, and by authorized representatives of the Department of Labor. Section 3.5 Payroll deductions permissible without application to or approval of the Secretary of Labor. Deductions made under the circumstances or in the situations described in the paragraphs of this section may be made without application to and approval of the Secretary of Labor: �.. (a) Any deduction made in compliance with the requirements of Federal, State, or local law, such as Federal or State withholding income taxes and Federal social security taxes. (b) Any deduction of sums previously paid to the employee as a "bona fide prepayment of wages" when such prepayment is made without discount or interest. A "bona fide prepayment of wages" is considered to have been made only when cash or its equivalent has been advanced to the person employed in such manner as to give him complete freedom of disposition of the advanced funds. (c) Any deduction of amounts required by court process to be paid to another, unless the deduction is in favor of the contractor, subcontractor or any affiliated person, or when collusion or collaboration exists. (d) Any deductions constituting a contribution on behalf of the person employed to funds established by the employer or representatives of employees, medical or hospital care, pensions or annuities on retirement, death benefits, compensation for injuries, illness, accidents, sickness, or disability, or for insurance to provide any of the foregoing, or unemployment benefits, vacation pay, savings accounts, or similar payments for the benefit of employees, their families and dependents: Provided, however, that the n following standards are met: (1) The deduction is not otherwise prohibited by law: (2) it is either: (i) Voluntarily consented to by the employee in writing and in advance of the period in which the work is to be done and such consent is not a condition either for the obtaining of or for the continuation of �— employment, or (ii) provided for in a bona fide collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and representatives of its employees; (3) no profit or other benefit is otherwise obtained, directly or indirectly, by the contractor or subcontractor or any affiliated person in the form of commission, dividend, or otherwise; and (4) the deductions shall serve the convenience and interest of the employee. (e) Any deduction contributing toward the purchase of United States Defense Stamps and Bonds when voluntarily authorized by the employee. (f) Any deduction requested by the employee to enable him to repay loans to or to purchase �. shares in credit unions organized and operated in accordance with Federal and State credit union statutes. f—* (g) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions to governmental or quasi -governmental agencies, such as the American Red Cross. (h) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions to Community Chests, United Givers Funds, and similar charitable organizations. (i) Any deduction to pay regular union initiation fees and membership dues, not including fines or special assessments: Provided, however, that a collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and representatives of its employees provides for such deductions and the deductions are not otherwise prohibited by law. (j) Any deduction not more than for the "reasonable cost" of board, lodging, or other facilities meeting the requirements of section 3(m) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, and 54 part 531 of this title. When such a deduction is made the additional records required under Section 516.27(a) of this title shall be kept. Section 3.6 Payroll deductions permissible with the approval of the Secretary of Labor. Any contractor or subcontractor may apply to the Secretary of Labor for permission to make any deduction not permitted under Section 3.5. (a) The contractor, subcontractor, or any affiliated person does not make a profit or benefit directly or indirectly from the deduction either in the form of a commission, dividend, or otherwise; (b) The deduction is not otherwise prohibited by law; (c) The deduction is either (1) voluntarily consented to by the employee in writing and in advance of the period in which the work is to be done and such consent is a condition either for the obtaining of employment or its continuance, or (2) provided for in a bona fide collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and representives of its employees; and (d) The deduction serves the convenience and interest of the employee. Section 3.7 Applications for the approval of the Secretary of Labor. Any application for the making of payroll deductions under Section 3.6 shall comply with the requirements prescribed in the following paragraphs of this section: (a) The application shall be in writing and shall be addressed to the Secretary of Labor. (b) The application shall identify the contract or contracts under which the work in question is to be performed. Permission will be given for deductions only on specific, identified contracts, except upon a showing of exceptional circumstances. (c) The application shall state affirmatively that there is compliance with the standards set forth in the provisions of Section 3.6. The affirmation shall be accompanied by a full statement of the facts indicating such compliance. (d) The application shall include a description of the proposed deduction, the purpose to be served thereby, and the classes of laborers or mechanics from whose wages the proposed deduction would be made. (e) The application shall state the name and business of any third person to whom any funds obtained from the proposed deductions are to be transmitted and the affiliation of such person, if any, with the applicant. Section 3.8 Action by the Secretary of Labor upon applications. The Secretary of Labor shall decide whether or not the requested deduction is permissible under provisions of Section 3.6; and shall notify the applicant in writing of his decision. Section 3.9 Prohibited payroll deductions. Deductions not elsewhere provided for by this part and which are not found to be permissible under Section 3.6 are prohibited. Section 3.10 Methods of payment of wages. 55 The payment of wages shall be by cash, negotiable instruments payable on demand, or the additional forms of compensation for which deductions are permissible under this part. No other methods of payment shall be recognized on work subject to the the Copeland Act. Section 3.11 Regulations part of contract. All contracts made with respect to the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of any public building or public work or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States covered by the regulations in this part shall expressly bind the contractor or subcontractor to comply with such of the regulations in this part as may be applicable. in this regard, see Section 5.5 (a) of this subtitle. (This page left blank intentionally) kY-I EXHIBIT B WAGE DETERMINATION Y 110PO-001U.S. Department of Labor _ GENERAL WAGE DECISION NO. TX9O-39 — Supercedes General Wage Decision No. TX89-39 — State: ",: TEXAS County(ies): ZONE i - Baily, Borden, Cochran, Cottle, Crosby, Dawson, Dickens, Fisher, Floyd, Foard, Gaines, Garza. - Hale, Haskell, Hockley, Jones, Kent, King, Knox, Lamb, Lynn, Motley, Scurry, Shackleford, Stephens, Stonewall, Terry, Throckmorton, Yoakum & Young — ZONE 2 - Lubbock Construction Type: Heavy & Highway Construction _ Description: Heavy (excluding tunnels & dams) and Highway Projects (does not include building structures.in rest area projects) Modification Record: No. Publication Date Page No.(s) _ Vol. 11 1091 TXSO-39 ASPHALT HEATER OPERATOR ASPHALT RAKER `:'BATCHING PLANT SCALE OPERATOR .., _.., CARPENTER CARPENTER HELPER CONCRETE FINISHER (PAVING) CONCRETE FINISHER (STRUCTURES) CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER (STRUCTURES) ELECTRICIAN FORM BUILDER (STRUCTURES) FORM BUILDER HELPER (STRUCTURES) "~ FORM SETTER (STRUCTURES) FORM SETTER HELPER (STRUCTURES) LABORER, COMMON LABORER, UTILITY MECHANIC MECHANIC HELPER OILER ^^ SERVICER PIPELAYER BLASTER REINFORCING STEEL SETTER (STRUCTURES) REINFORCING STEEL SETTER HELPER -- SPREADER BOX OPERATOR POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: Asphalt Distributor Asphalt Paving Machine Broom or Sweeper Operator Bulldozer 150 HP & Less Bulldozer over 150 HP Concrete Paving Finishing Machine Concrete Paving Joint Machine Concrete Paving Saw j Concrete Paving Mixer Concrete Paving Spreadev Crane, Clamshell, Backhoe, Derrick, Dragline, Shovel (less than 1 1/2 CY) Crane, Clamshell, Backhoe, Derrick, Dragline, Shovel 0 1/2 CY & Over) Crusher or Screening Plant Operator Foundation Drill Operator (Truck Mounted) Front End Loader (2 1/2 CY & less) Front End Loader (Over 2 1/2 CY) Motor Grader Operator, Fine Grade Motor Grader Operator Roller, Steel Wheel (Plant -Mix Pave- ment) Roller, Steel Wheel (Other -Flat Wheel or Tamping) Roller', Pneumatic (Self -Propelled) Vol. II 1092 Basic Basic Hourly Hourly Rates Rates (ZONE 1 (ZONE 2 6.60 7.50 6.30 7.30 8.00 8.00 7.90 8.00 7.00 6.30 7.40 8,00 7.15 7.55 6,75 7.00 - 12.45 7.00 6.50 6.65 7.65 7,25 6.85 6.70 6.10 6.30 6.65 6.95 9.60 11.00 8.65 8.75 6.80 6.85 7.25 6.75 - 7.00 7.90 7.25 11.40 _...- --..8 ..60 7.25 - 7.65 8,00 7,80 8.35 6.45 - 7.40 7.00 8.10 - - 9.00 - 6.30 6,85 8.-75 6.50 - 8.25 8.65 9.30 8.65 8.00 6.30 9.00 10.40 •7.30 7.75 8.00 7.80 10.05 10.90 8.95 9.85 6,85 7.10 6.10 6.45 6.10 6.55 'N u.ti. uepartment 01 LaDor POP- TXSO-39 Scrapers (17 CY & Less) 6.75 6.95 Scrapers (Over 17 CY) 7.50 _ 7.30 Tractor (Crawler Type) over 150 HP 7.60 8.50 Tractor (Pneumatic) 80 HP & Less 6.10 6.30 Tractor (Pneumatic) over 80 HP 6.50 6.50 ~ Wagon Drill, Boring Machine or Post Hole Driller Operator 6.75 - TRUCK DRIVERS: Single Axle, Light 6.10 6.30 Single Axle, Heavy 6.70 6.40 Tandem Axle or Semitrailer 6.60 7.00 Lowboy - Float 7.35 - Vibrator (Hand Type) 6.25 - Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR, 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). Vol. 11 1093 57 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE TO: (Name of Bidder) (Address of Bidder) (City and State of Bidder) The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the day of 19_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of , 19_, at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fait to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Owner's Representative (This page left blank intentionally) ' TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ********************************************************************** PROJECT City of Lubbock Training Room City Hall Lubbock, Texas ********************************************************************** ARCHITECTS McLartySmithMeyerArchitectsAIA, Inc. 1919 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 (806) 763-5046 ENGINEERS Higgins & May 1518 34th Lubbock, Texas 79405 (806) 762-0419 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79408 Jaznaaz`7 9, 1990 ~ ��,- (This page left blank intentionally) TABLE OF CONTENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF LUBBOCK TRAINING ROOM CITY HALL Cover Sheet Table of Contents ` 01 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS: 01010 - Summary of Work 01040 - Project Coordination 01045 - Cutting & Patching 01090 - Definitions & Standards 01310 - Schedules, Reports, Payments 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples 01605 - Products & Substitutions 01705 - Project Closeout 02 - SITE WORK: 02070 - Building Demolition 03 - 04 NA 05 - METALS: 05500 - Metal Fabrications 06 - WOODS & PLASTICS: 06100 - Rough Carpentry 06400 - Architectural Woodwork 07 - MOISTURE & THERMAL PROTECTION: 07200 - Insulation 07900 - Joint Sealers 08 - DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS: 08110 - Steel Frames 08210 - Wood Doors 08350 - Folding Doors 08710 - Hardware 09 - FINISHES: 09250 - Gypsum Drywall 09510 - Acoustic Ceilings 09650 - Resilient Base 09680 - Carpet 09900 - Painting 09950 - Wall Covering 10 - SPECIALTIES: 10100 - Chalk & Tackboard TABLE OF CONTENTS -- .�` � ^ ` '! ^ 11 - 14 NA ` ^ ` �15 - MECHANICAL: ` 15010 - General 15400 - Plumbing 15800 - Heating, Ventilating & Airconditioning 16 - ELECTRICAL: 16010 - Electrical END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2 PART_________ NERAL _ _ | ` 1.01: : Provide all tools, equipment, materials and labor to ' accomplish the work specified herein and shown on the drawings. +- 1^02: PROJECT/WORK_IDENTIFICATION: A. Anowl: Project name is CITY_OF_LUBBOCK_TRAINING_RO8M, Lub- ' bock Texas; as shown on Contract Documents prepared by Mc- �4 � LartySmithMeyerArchitectsAIA,Inc., 1919 Broadway, Lubbock, ' Texas 79401, Drawings and Specifications dated janilary g, 1990, B. C������t_Dg�L����t� indicate the work of the Contract and re- lated requirements and conditions that have an impact on the project. r_ C. S������_b�_R : Work of the Contract can be summarized ' by references to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplemen- tary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, addenda and modifications to the contract documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this project manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. It is recognized that work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces outside the contract documents. ' 1^03: CONTRACTOR_USE_OF-PREMISES: GgUgEll: The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to the work indicated, so as to allow for Owner occupancy and use r� by the public. .' B. U����_[lf_th��_Sit��: Confine operations at the site to the areas ` permitted under the Contract Portions of the site beyond '.( perm ^ areas on which work is indicated are not to be disturbed. � Conform to site rules and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project construction. 1. Keep existing driveways and entrances serving the premises ' clear and available to the Owner and his employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of mate- rials. 2. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equip- ment. Confine stockpiling of materials and location of storage sheds to the areas indicated. If additional storage is neces- sary obtain and pay for such storage off site. 3. Lock automotive type vehicles, such as passenger cars and trucks and other mechanized or motorized construction equip- ment, when parked and unattended so as to prevent unauthorized , , use. Do not leave such vehicles or equipment unattended with the motor running or the ignition key in place. "« C. Cg�t[����tg�.�_U��_gf_th��_E��i�ti[l�_B�ildi�g: Maintain the exist- ing building in a safe and weathertight condition throughout ' . the construction period Repair damage caused by construction l{ operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. } ' � SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01010 - 1 ` .. , ' 1 . Keep public areas such as hallways, stairs, elevator- lobbies and toilet rooms free from accumulation of waste material, rubbish or construction debris. 2. Smoking or open fires will not be permitted within the building enclosure or can the premises. 1.04: UWt�IEF;_L�CCUF'fll�fi'_r.; The Owner will occupy the site and the exist-- ing building during the entire period of construction. Coope- r -ate fully with the Owner- or his representative during cot;- structon operations to minimize conflicts and to facilitate Gamer- usage. Perform the word: so as not to interfere with the Owner"s operation. 1.05: ALTERA7 IONS 0ND cot_Ih'Q Q11 QN: A. C_enc:.n : The work of this Contract'. :includes coordination of the entire work of the project, including preparation of gene- ral coordination drawings, diagrams and schedules, and control of site utilization, from beginning of construction activity through project close-out and warranty periods. E�. Alterations: Where applicable, requirements of the contract documents apply to alteration work in the same manner" as to new construction. Refer to drawings for specific requirements of alteration work. 1. 06: 1"1 T SCf�_LL_r?t�lEl_�Ua 1='F:OUT ; T UI'�C ; A. t'I�CI_Ianl ctrl JE^.1C"Y 1 Cid _eg�_�i rn;�nt�s_r�f _Gcricr _�1 _�rJc��wE;: 1. General: Comply with applicable requirements of Division -15 sections for mechanical provisions within units of general (Division 2-14) Work. Comply with applicable requirements of Division -16 sections for electrical provisions within units of general (Division :'-14) Work. ^. 5er-v_ice_Ccanriec^tior'r:: Refer to Division -15 and Division -16 sections for the characteristics of the mechanical and electri- cal services to be connected to units of gener'al. work. Provide units manufactured or fabricated for proper connection to and utilization of available services, as indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, final connecti ort of mechanical services to general work is defined as being mechanical work, and final connection of electrical services to general wore: is defined as electrical work:. 3. Comply with applicable provisions of The National Electrical Code (NEC) and standards by National Electrical Manufacturer's Association; (NEMA), for electrical components of general work. Provide Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled products where applicable. I .F'�r_fr�r_'rnMr7c�e_R�c�c_tii�e�a,�an't�_,for__( omnl�t�i�_Wr�r_ET:: The Contract >:> Documents indicate the intended occupancy and utilization of the building and its individual systema ansa facilities. Com- om- pliance pliante with governing regulations is intended and required for or - the the wort; and for the Owner's occupancy and utilization. In addition to the requirement that every element of the wort.. SUMMARY OF THE WORI-'." 01010 -. 2 r- comply with applicable requirements of the contract documents, '^ it is also required that the work as a whole comply with the following general building performance requirements. 1.07: DESCRIPTION OF BASE BID: TRAINING ROOM - Provide all tools, coordination, labor, equipment and materials to alter the un- finished interior as specified herein and shown on the draw- ings; including but not limited to all general, mechanical and electrical work indicated. Applicable details are indicated on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable). PART S - XECUTION (Not applicable). END OF SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01010 - 3 2100- PF:OJEC'i COOBDINA'l-ION P�F^T_ 1 _�_GGl�lEfJAL_ 1. C►1: t:OORDII�N-a'1"ICIt•+I AND iiE'E-"'PINGS: A. verno al : Prepare a written memo on required coordination act- ivities. ct- iviti.es. Include such items as required notices, reports and attendance at meetings. Distribute this memo to each entity performing work at the project site. Prepare similar memo for separate contractors where interfacing of work: is required. S. Iclrit rr l Y�_Cc�ord i n_a_t i o_n_h1e_e_t: i n_q : Hold monthly gerrer--a:l project coordination~ meetings at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. These meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes;, such as regular project meetings .and special preinstallation meetings. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently in- volved in coordination or planning for the work of the entire project. Conduct meetings in a manner which will resolve coordination problems. Record results of the meeting and dis- tribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. At Con- tractor's option, monthly coordination meetings can be held integrally with monthly progress meetings as specified in sec- tion "Schedules, Reports, Payments". 1.02: SURVEg.YS_F,ND RECORDS/REPORTS: Working from lines anti levels established by the property survey, establish and maintain bench marls and other dependable markers. Establish bench marks and markers to set lines and levels for work at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown within recognized tolerances. Drawings shall not be scaled to determine dimensions. Advise entities performing work, of marked lines_; and levels provided for their use. 1.0 LINITATIONS ON USE OE THE SITE:.: Limitations on site usage as well as specific requirements that impact site utilization are indicated on the drawings and by other contract documents. In addition to these limitations and requirements administer allo- cation of available space equitably among entities needing both access and space so as to produce the best overall efficiency in performance of the total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. PART_2_1 EXECUTION 2.01: Cil= NI RAL I I�iw3"I' ALLA"f I01'! F'FtOV l: S T OfdS: A. Cn t 1 1 Fri__" s_Tn ppcti crn_c�:f_Cclri� i ti cans: Require i:t•ie Installer of each major unit of wort: to inspect the substrate to receive the wort: and conditions under which the wort; is to be performed. The Installer shall report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner ac - PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 1 ~ /. �� .. ' ceptable to the Installer. B. M��[l�f����t�����,�_I[l�t���tion�: Where installations include manu- factured factured products, comply with the manufacturer's applicable ` instructions and recommendations for installation, to the ex - tent that these instructions and recommendations are more ex- licqq }� oit or more stringent than requirements indicated in the '-�� - � contract documents. C. I� ����h_it�� of materials or equipment immediately prior-- to riorto installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. p�g�id�_�tt��h���t and connection devices and methods for secu- ring work. Secure work true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances. Allow expansion and building movement. Provide uniform joint width in exposed work. Ar- range joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable visual -effect choices to the Architect/Engi- neer for final decision. E. R���h���k_����������U����t� and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation. F. I��t��ll����h_��it��gf��g[k during weather conditions and project status which will ensure the best possible results in coordina- tion with the entire work. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. of the work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize the necessity of uncovering the work for that purpose. H. Mguntim_NighA: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect/ - Engineer for final decision. 2.02: CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Ma2ml: During handling and installation of work at the project site, clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work at the basis of continuous maintenance. Apply protective covering on installed work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construc- tion period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to en- sure operability without damaging effects. B. LiLniting_E���������_gf_Wg�k: To the extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, supervise perform - of the work in such a manner and by such means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. END OF OF SECTION 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 2